FCC ID: I88AMG1302 Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway

 

AMG1302-T10A Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway Default Login Details LAN IP Address Password https://192.168.1.1 1234 Version 1.00 Edition 1, 2/2012 www.zyxel.com www.zyxel.com IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Copyright 2012 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems, operating system versions, or if you installed updated firmware/software for your device. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Device and access the Web Configurator wizards. (See the wizard real time help for information on configuring each screen.) It also contains a connection diagram. 2 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide .......................................................................................................................................13 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................15 The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................21 Status Screens ........................................................................................................................................27 Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................31 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................53 Internet Setup Wizard ............................................................................................................................. 55 WAN Setup .............................................................................................................................................69 LAN Setup ...............................................................................................................................................85 Wireless LAN ..........................................................................................................................................97 Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................127 Firewalls ................................................................................................................................................141 Filters ....................................................................................................................................................153 Static Route ...........................................................................................................................................159 Port Binding ...........................................................................................................................................163 PVID Setting ..........................................................................................................................................167 Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................169 Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................177 Remote Management ............................................................................................................................179 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ...........................................................................................................187 CWMP ...................................................................................................................................................199 System Settings ....................................................................................................................................203 Logs ......................................................................................................................................................207 Tools ......................................................................................................................................................217 Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................223 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................227 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 3 Contents Overview 4 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5 Part I: Users Guide ......................................................................................... 13 Chapter 1 Introduction.........................................................................................................................................15 1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................15 1.2 Ways to Manage the Device .............................................................................................................15 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device ..............................................................................................15 1.4 Applications for the Device ................................................................................................................16 1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................16 1.5 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................16 1.5.1 Using the WPS/WLAN Button .................................................................................................17 1.6 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................................18 1.7 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................19 1.7.1 Using the Reset Button ............................................................................................................19 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator ........................................................................................................................21 2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................21 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................21 2.2 The Main Screen ...............................................................................................................................23 2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................23 2.2.2 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................24 2.2.3 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................25 2.2.4 Status Bar ................................................................................................................................26 Chapter 3 Status Screens....................................................................................................................................27 3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................27 3.2 The Status Screen .............................................................................................................................28 Chapter 4 Tutorials...............................................................................................................................................31 4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................31 4.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .............................................................................................31 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 5 Table of Contents 4.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings .............................................................................31 4.2.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................33 4.2.3 Without WPS ...........................................................................................................................36 4.2.4 Setting Up Wireless Network Scheduling ................................................................................37 4.3 Configuring the MAC Address Filter ..................................................................................................38 4.4 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network .................................................................40 4.5 Multiple Public and Private IP Address Mappings .............................................................................42 4.5.1 Full Feature NAT + Many-to-Many No Overload Mapping ......................................................43 4.5.2 Full Feature NAT + One-to-One Mapping ................................................................................44 4.6 Firewall Rule to Allow a Specified Service ........................................................................................46 4.7 Port BindingConfiguration ................................................................................................................48 4.7.1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections .............................................................48 4.7.2 Configuring Port Binding ..........................................................................................................51 Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 53 Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard.........................................................................................................................55 5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................55 5.2 Internet Access Wizard Setup ...........................................................................................................55 5.2.1 Manual Configuration ..............................................................................................................58 5.3 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup ...................................................................................................63 5.3.1 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key ............................................................................................66 5.3.2 Manually Assign a WEP Key ...................................................................................................66 Chapter 6 WAN Setup ..........................................................................................................................................69 6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................69 6.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens ...................................................................................69 6.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN ......................................................................................69 6.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................70 6.2 The Internet Access Setup Screen ...................................................................................................71 6.2.1 Advanced Internet Access Setup ............................................................................................74 6.3 The More Connections Screen .........................................................................................................75 6.3.1 More Connections Edit ............................................................................................................77 6.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup .....................................................................79 6.4 WAN Technical Reference ................................................................................................................80 6.4.1 Encapsulation ..........................................................................................................................80 6.4.2 Multiplexing ..............................................................................................................................81 6.4.3 VPI and VCI .............................................................................................................................81 6.4.4 IP Address Assignment ...........................................................................................................81 6 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Table of Contents 6.4.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) ...................................................................................................82 6.4.6 NAT ..........................................................................................................................................82 6.5 Traffic Shaping ..................................................................................................................................82 6.5.1 ATM Traffic Classes .................................................................................................................83 Chapter 7 LAN Setup ...........................................................................................................................................85 7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................85 7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens ....................................................................................85 7.1.2 What You Need To Know About LAN ......................................................................................85 7.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................86 7.2 The LAN IP Screen ...........................................................................................................................86 7.2.1 The Advanced LAN IP Setup Screen ......................................................................................87 7.3 The DHCP Server Screen .................................................................................................................88 7.4 The Client List Screen .......................................................................................................................89 7.5 The IP Alias Screen ..........................................................................................................................90 7.5.1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen .......................................................................................91 7.6 The IPv6 Screen ...............................................................................................................................92 7.7 LAN Technical Reference ..................................................................................................................93 7.7.1 LANs, WANs and the Device ...................................................................................................93 7.7.2 DHCP Setup ............................................................................................................................93 7.7.3 DNS Server Addresses ...........................................................................................................94 7.7.4 LAN TCP/IP .............................................................................................................................94 7.7.5 RIP Setup ................................................................................................................................95 7.7.6 Multicast ..................................................................................................................................96 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN.......................................................................................................................................97 8.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................97 8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens .....................................................................97 8.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless ................................................................................98 8.1.3 Before You Start .......................................................................................................................98 8.2 The AP Screen ..................................................................................................................................99 8.2.1 No Security ............................................................................................................................100 8.2.2 WEP Encryption ....................................................................................................................100 8.2.3 WPA(2)-PSK ..........................................................................................................................102 8.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication ...........................................................................................................103 8.2.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup .............................................................................................104 8.2.6 MAC Filter ..........................................................................................................................106 8.3 The More AP Screen .......................................................................................................................106 8.3.1 More AP Edit .........................................................................................................................107 8.4 The WPS Screen ............................................................................................................................108 8.5 The WPS Station Screen ................................................................................................................109 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 7 Table of Contents 8.6 The WDS Screen ............................................................................................................................ 110 8.7 The Scheduling Screen ................................................................................................................... 112 8.8 Wireless LAN Technical Reference ................................................................................................. 112 8.8.1 Wireless Network Overview ................................................................................................... 113 8.8.2 Additional Wireless Terms ..................................................................................................... 114 8.8.3 Wireless Security Overview ................................................................................................... 114 8.8.4 Signal Problems .................................................................................................................... 117 8.8.5 BSS ....................................................................................................................................... 117 8.8.6 MBSSID ................................................................................................................................. 118 8.8.7 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ..................................................................................... 118 8.8.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ................................................................................................. 118 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................127 9.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................127 9.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens ..................................................................................127 9.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT ....................................................................................127 9.2 The NAT General Setup Screen .....................................................................................................128 9.3 The Port Forwarding Screen ...........................................................................................................129 9.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen ...............................................................................130 9.3.2 The Port Forwarding Rule Edit Screen ..................................................................................132 9.4 The Address Mapping Screen .........................................................................................................133 9.4.1 The Address Mapping Rule Edit Screen ...............................................................................134 9.5 The ALG Screen .............................................................................................................................135 9.6 NAT Technical Reference ................................................................................................................136 9.6.1 NAT Definitions ......................................................................................................................136 9.6.2 What NAT Does .....................................................................................................................137 9.6.3 How NAT Works ....................................................................................................................137 9.6.4 NAT Application .....................................................................................................................138 9.6.5 NAT Mapping Types ..............................................................................................................138 Chapter 10 Firewalls ............................................................................................................................................141 10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................141 10.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens ...........................................................................141 10.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall ..............................................................................141 10.2 The Firewall General Screen ........................................................................................................142 10.3 The Firewall Rule Screen ..............................................................................................................143 10.3.1 Configuring Firewall Rules .................................................................................................146 10.3.2 Customized Services ..........................................................................................................147 10.3.3 Configuring a Customized Service ....................................................................................148 10.4 Firewall Technical Reference ........................................................................................................149 10.4.1 Firewall Rules Overview ......................................................................................................149 8 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Table of Contents 10.4.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall .......................................................150 10.4.3 Security Considerations .......................................................................................................150 10.4.4 Triangle Route .....................................................................................................................151 Chapter 11 Filters .................................................................................................................................................153 11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................153 11.1.1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens ...............................................................................153 11.1.2 What You Need to Know About Filtering ..............................................................................153 11.2 The URL Filter Screen ..................................................................................................................154 11.3 The Application Filter Screen ........................................................................................................154 11.4 The IP/MAC Filter Screen .............................................................................................................156 Chapter 12 Static Route.......................................................................................................................................159 12.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................159 12.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens ....................................................................160 12.2 The Static Route Screen ...............................................................................................................160 12.2.1 Static Route Edit ................................................................................................................161 Chapter 13 Port Binding ......................................................................................................................................163 13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................163 13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens ...................................................................164 13.2 The Port Binding Screen ...............................................................................................................164 13.2.1 Port Binding Summary screen .............................................................................................165 Chapter 14 PVID Setting ......................................................................................................................................167 14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................167 14.1.1 What You Can Do in the pvid Setting Screen ......................................................................167 14.1.2 What You Need to Know About 802.1Q ..............................................................................167 14.2 The pvid Setting Screen ................................................................................................................168 Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................169 15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................169 15.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens ................................................................................169 15.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS ...................................................................................170 15.2 The QoS Screen ..........................................................................................................................170 15.2.1 The QoS Settings Summary Screen ...................................................................................173 15.3 QoS Technical Reference .............................................................................................................174 15.3.1 IEEE 802.1p ........................................................................................................................174 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 9 Table of Contents 15.3.2 IP Precedence .....................................................................................................................174 15.3.3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment .................................................................................175 Chapter 16 Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................177 16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................177 16.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen ...............................................................................177 16.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS ...............................................................................177 16.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................178 Chapter 17 Remote Management........................................................................................................................179 17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................179 17.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens ....................................................180 17.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management ........................................................180 17.2 The WWW Screen ........................................................................................................................181 17.2.1 Configuring the WWW Screen .............................................................................................181 17.3 The Telnet Screen .........................................................................................................................181 17.4 The FTP Screen ............................................................................................................................182 17.5 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................................183 17.5.1 Configuring SNMP ...............................................................................................................184 17.6 The DNS Screen ..........................................................................................................................185 17.7 The ICMP Screen ..........................................................................................................................185 Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)......................................................................................................187 18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................187 18.1.1 What You Can Do in the UPnP Screen ...............................................................................187 18.1.2 What You Need to Know About UPnP .................................................................................187 18.2 The UPnP Screen .........................................................................................................................188 18.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example ...........................................................................................189 18.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ..........................................................................................192 Chapter 19 CWMP ................................................................................................................................................199 19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................199 19.2 The CWMP Setup Screen .............................................................................................................200 Chapter 20 System Settings................................................................................................................................203 20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................203 20.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens .............................................................203 20.2 The General Screen ......................................................................................................................203 10 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Table of Contents 20.3 The Time and Date Screen ..........................................................................................................204 Chapter 21 Logs ...................................................................................................................................................207 21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................207 21.1.1 What You Need To Know About Logs ..................................................................................207 21.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................207 21.3 Log Descriptions ...........................................................................................................................209 Chapter 22 Tools ..................................................................................................................................................217 22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................217 22.1.1 What You Can Do in the Tool Screens ................................................................................217 22.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................217 22.3 The Configuration Screen .............................................................................................................219 22.4 The Restart Screen .......................................................................................................................221 Chapter 23 Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................223 23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................223 23.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens ......................................................................223 23.2 The General Screen ......................................................................................................................223 23.3 The DSL Line Screen ....................................................................................................................224 Chapter 24 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................227 24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................227 24.2 Device Access and Login ..............................................................................................................228 24.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................229 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address.......................................................................231 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting.......................................................................................251 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions .................................................259 Appendix D Wireless LANs..............................................................................................................267 Appendix E IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................281 Appendix F Services........................................................................................................................291 Appendix G Legal Information .........................................................................................................295 Safety Warnings................................................................................................................................321 Index ..................................................................................................................................................323 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 12 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide PART I Users Guide 13 14 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview The Device is a high speed ADSL2+ 802.11n wireless router with built-in switch, firewall and content filtering. You are provided with ease of installation and shared Internet access. The robust firewall and content filtering features make the Device a complete security solution. Only use firmware for your Devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device. Note: All screens displayed in this users guide are from the AMG1302-T10A model. 1.2 Ways to Manage the Device Use any of the following methods to manage the Device. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a

(supported) web browser. Command Line Interface. Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers. FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device. 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device Do the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would have to totally re-configure the Device. You could simply restore your last configuration. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 15 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.4 Applications for the Device Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited. 1.4.1 Internet Access Your Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. Computers can connect to the Devices LAN ports (or wirelessly). Figure 1 Devices Router Features LAN DSL You can also configure firewall and content filtering feature on the Device for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. Use the filtering feature to block access to specific web sites or Internet applications such as MSN or Yahoo Messenger. You can also configure IP/MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic. Use QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. For example, you could make sure that the Device gives voice over Internet calls high priority, and/or limit bandwidth devoted to the bosss excessive file downloading. 1.5 Wireless Access The Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebooks, computers or PDAs and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables. 16 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS button. Figure 2 Wireless Access Example Chapter 1 Introduction 1.5.1 Using the WPS/WLAN Button Use the WPS/WLAN button on the Device to activate and deactivate wireless. To turn it on, simply press the WPS/WLAN button for 1 second. Once the WPS/WLAN LED turns green, the wireless network is active. You can also use the WPS/WLAN button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time. To activate WPS:

1 Make sure the POWER LED is on and blinking. 2 Press the WPS/WLAN button for five to ten seconds and release it. 3 Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the Device. The WPS/WLAN LED should flash while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device. 4 Once the connection is successfully made, the WPS/WLAN LED shines green. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.6 LEDs (Lights) The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs. Figure 3 LEDs None of the LEDs are on if the Device is receiving power. Table 1 LED Descriptions LED POWER COLOR Green STATUS On Blinking On Red LAN 1-4 Green Off On DESCRIPTION The Device is receiving power and ready for use. The Device is self-testing. The Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. The Device is receiving power. The Device has an Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). The Device is sending/receiving data to /from the LAN. The Device does have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. The wireless network is activated. The Device is communicating with other wireless clients. Blinking Off On Blinking Blinking The Device is setting up a WPS connection. Off On Blinking Off On The wireless network is activated. The DSL line is up. The Device is initializing the DSL line. The DSL line is down. The Device has an IP connection but no traffic. WPS/WLAN Green Red DSL Green INTERNET Green Red Blinking On Off Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic. The Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed. The Device does have an IP connection. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections. 18 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 1.7 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234. Chapter 1 Introduction 1.7.1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (blinking). 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introduction 20 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 2 The Web Configurator 2.1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). See Appendix C on page 259 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 4 Launch your web browser. Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL. A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the Device, type the admin password (1234 by default) in the password screen and click Login. Click Cancel to revert to the default user password in the password field. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. Figure 4 Password Screen AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 21 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 5 The following screen displays if you have yet changed your password. It is strongly recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and click Apply;

alternatively click Ignore to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now. Figure 5 Change Password Screen 6 Select Go to Wizard setup and click Apply to display the wizard main screen. Otherwise, select Go to Advanced setup and click Apply to display the Status screen. Figure 6 Replace Factory Default Certificate Screen Note: For security reasons, the Device automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for five minutes (default). If this happens, log in again. 22 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2.2 The Main Screen Figure 7 Main Screen A B C D As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:

A - title bar B - navigation panel C - main window D - status bar 2.2.1 Title Bar The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 23 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator The icons provide the following functions. Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar ICON DESCRIPTION Wizards: Click this icon to go to the configuration wizards. See Chapter 5 on page 55 for more information. Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator. 2.2.2 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features. The following tables describe each menu item. Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Status FUNCTION This screen shows the Devices general device and network status information. Use this screen to access the statistics and client list. TAB Network WAN LAN Internet Access Setup More Connections IP DHCP Server Client List IP Alias IPv6 Wireless LAN AP More AP WPS WPS Station WDS Scheduling Use this screen to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties. Use this screen to configure additional WAN connections. Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties. Use this screen to configure LAN DHCP settings and DNS server. Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses (and host names). Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into subnets. Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings on the Devices LAN interface. Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device. Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) settings. Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network. Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System links to other access points. Use this screen to configure the dates/times to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Use this screen to enable NAT. NAT Security General Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. ALG Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG. Firewall General Rules Use this screen to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets depending on packet direction. Use this screen to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule. 24 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Filter TAB URL Filter Application Filter IP/MAC Filter Advanced Static Route Port Binding pvid Setting QoS Dynamic DNS General Remote MGMT WWW Telnet FTP SNMP DNS ICMP General Chapter 2 The Web Configurator FUNCTION Use this screen to block access to certain URL web sites. Use this screen to allow or block traffic from certain applications. Use this screen to configure IP/MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic. Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device about networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes. Use this screen to configure and view port binding groups. Use this screen to configure 802.1Q settings. Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also configure the QoS rules and actions. This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the Device. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the Device. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the Device. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can access the SNMP agent on the Device. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the Device. Use this screen to set whether or not your device will respond to pings and probes for services that you have not made available. Use this screen to turn UPnP on or off. Use this screen to have a management server manage the Device with TR-069. General Time and Date System Log Firmware Configuration Restart General DSL Line Use this screen to configure your devices password. Use this screen to change your Devices time and date. Use this screen to select which logs your device is to record. Use this screen to upload firmware to your device. Use this screen to backup and restore your devices configuration

(settings) or reset the factory default settings. This screen allows you to reboot the Device without turning the power off. Use this screen to test the connections to other devices. This screen displays information to help you identify problems with the DSL connection. UPnP CWMP Maintenance System Logs Tools Diagnostic 2.2.3 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 25 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Right after you log in, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 3 on page 27 for more information about the Status screen. 2.2.4 Status Bar Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration has been updated. 26 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 3 Status Screens 3.1 Overview Use the Status screens to look at the current status of the device, system resources, and interfaces (LAN and WAN). The Status screen also provides detailed information from DHCP and statistics from bandwidth management, and traffic. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 27 Chapter 3 Status Screens 3.2 The Status Screen Use this screen to view the status of the Device. Click Status to open this screen. Figure 8 Status Screen Each field is described in the following table. Table 4 Status Screen LABEL Refresh Interval Apply Device Information DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the Device to update this screen. Click this to update this screen immediately. Host Name Model Number MAC Address ZyNOS Firmware Version DSL Firmware Version This field displays the Device system name. It is used for identification. This is the model name of your device. This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your Device. This is the current version of the firmware inside the device. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the current version of the devices DSL modem code. 28 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 3 Status Screens Table 4 Status Screen LABEL IPv4 WAN Information DESCRIPTION DSL Mode Annex Type IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway VPI/VCI This is the DSL standard that your Device is using. This is the current IP address of the Device in the WAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.If Connect Manually is enabled in Internet Access Setup, you can click Connect to connect to the WAN. This is the current subnet mask in the WAN. This is the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable. This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the wizard or WAN screen. IPv6 WAN Information DSL Mode IPv6 Address Default Gateway VPI/VCI IPv4 LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP This is the DSL standard that your Device is using. This is the current IPv6 address of the Device in the WAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the IPv6 address of the default gateway, if applicable. This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the wizard or WAN screen. This is the current IP address of the Device in the LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the current subnet mask in the LAN. This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:

Server - The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. None - The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. IPv6 LAN Information IPv6 Address WLAN Information ESSID Channel Security WPS Status Security Firewall System Status This is the current IPv6 address of the Device in the LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in a wireless LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the channel number used by the Device now. This displays the type of security mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN. This displays whether WPS is activated. Click this to go to the screen where you can configure the settings. This displays whether WLAN is activated. This displays whether or not the Devices firewall is activated. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 29 Chapter 3 Status Screens Table 4 Status Screen LABEL System Uptime Current Date/

Time System Mode CPU Usage Memory Usage Interface Status Interface Status Rate DESCRIPTION This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up. The Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Tools >

Restart), or when you reset it. This field displays the current date and time in the Device. You can change this in Maintenance > System > Time Setting. This displays whether the Device is functioning as a router or a bridge. This field displays what percentage of the Devices processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the Device is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 15 on page 169). This field displays what percentage of the Devices memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 22.4 on page 221, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds. This column displays each interface the Device has. This field indicates whether or not the Device is using the interface. For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop

(dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation. For the LAN interface, this field displays Up when the Device is using the interface and Down when the Device is not using the interface. For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when WLAN is disabled. For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting. For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate. For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled. 30 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 4 Tutorials 4.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to use the Devices various features. Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 31 Configuring the MAC Address Filter, see page 38 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 40 Multiple Public and Private IP Address Mappings, see page 42 Firewall Rule to Allow a Specified Service, see page 46 Port BindingConfiguration, see page 48 4.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet. In this wireless network, the Device serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP. Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the Device. Then he can set up a wireless network using WPS (Section 4.2.2 on page 33) or manual configuration (Section 4.2.3 on page 36). 4.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network. SSID Security Mode Pre-Shared Key 802.11 Mode Example WPA2-PSK with WPA Compatible DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork 802.11b+g+n AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 31 Chapter 4 Tutorials 1 Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the AP screen. Configure the screen using the provided parameters (see page 31). Click Apply. 2 Click the Advanced Setup button and select 802.11b+g+n in the 802.11 Mode field. Click Apply. Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the Device (see Section 4.2.2 on page 33). He can also use the notebooks wireless client to search for the Device (see Section 4.2.3 on page 36). 32 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 4.2.2 Using WPS Chapter 4 Tutorials This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the Device as the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook. Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCMCIA card). There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:

Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two methods. PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the Device. A wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the Device. Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your Device is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook. 3 4 In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button

(Start or WPS button). Push and hold the WPS button located on the Devices rear panel for more than 5 seconds. Alternatively, you may log into Devices web configurator and click the Push Button in the Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station screen. Note: Your Device has a WPS button located on its rear panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you can use one or the other. Note: It doesnt matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. The Device sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the Device securely. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 33 Chapter 4 Tutorials The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by pressing a button on both Device and wireless client. Example WPS Process: PBC Method Wireless Client Device WITHIN 2 MINUTES Press and hold for 5 seconds SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the Devices web configurator and the wireless clients utility. 1 Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. 34 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 2 Enter the PIN number in the PIN field in the Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station screen on the Device. Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Click the Start buttons (or the button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client utility screen and the Devices WPS Station screen within two minutes. The Device authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the Device securely. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 35 Chapter 4 Tutorials The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a Device and a wireless client by using PIN method. Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client Device WITHIN 2 MINUTES Authentication by PIN SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 4.2.3 Without WPS Use the wireless adapters utility installed on the notebook to search for the Example SSID. Then enter the DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork pre-shared key to establish an wireless Internet connection. 36 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Note: The Device supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computers wireless adapter supports one of these standards. 4.2.4 Setting Up Wireless Network Scheduling Thomas mostly uses his notebook to access the Internet on weekends; occasionally he uses it at night on weekdays. Here is how Thomas can set up a schedule to turn on the wireless network at specific time and days. 1 Click Network > Wireless Network > Scheduling to open the following screen. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 37 Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Configure the screen as follows. In the Everyday row, set the Action to Off. Then set wireless network from Mondays to Fridays to be On between 18:00 and 23:30. Turn on the wireless network all day on Saturdays and Sundays. Click Apply. 4.3 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Thomas iced that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams. Josephines computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the Device. Thomas can deny access to the wireless network using the MAC address of Josephines computer. Thomas Josephine 38 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 1 Click Network > LAN > Client List to open the following screen. Look for the MAC address of Josephines computer. Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the AP screen. Click the Edit button in the MAC Filter field. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 39 Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Select Enable MAC Filter and Deny Association. Enter the MAC address you found in the Client List screen. Click Apply. Josephine will no longer be able to access the Internet through the Device. 4.4 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to the Devices LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings. In the following figure, router R is connected to the Devices LAN. R connects to two networks, N1

(192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the Devices WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic. N1 A R N2 B 40 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide You need to specify a static routing rule on the Device to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B. Chapter 4 Tutorials N1 A R N2 B This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:

Table 5 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER The Devices WAN The Devices LAN A Rs N1 Rs N2 B IP ADDRESS 172.16.1.1 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.34 192.168.1.253 192.168.10.2 192.168.10.33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:

1 2 Log into the Devices Web Configurator in advanced mode. Click Advanced > Static Route. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 41 Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Click Edit on a new rule in the Static Route screen. 4 Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:

4a 4b Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2. Type 192.168.1.253 (Rs N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field. 4a Click Apply. Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure Bs firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through. 4.5 Multiple Public and Private IP Address Mappings If your ISP gives you more than one static IP address for your Internet access, you can map each IP address for a specific service. This tutorial assumes you are given two static public IP addresses. You want to map them to two servers A and B. IP-1 IP-2 B A 42 C AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials This tutorial uses the following example settings:

Table 6 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER The Devices WAN IP ADDRESS 172.16.1.253 (IP-1) 172.16.1.254 (IP-2) 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2 192.168.1.3 a.b.c.d The Devices LAN A B C To do this, you can use either of the following settings:

Full Feature NAT with many-to-many no overload mapping Full Feature NAT with one-to-one mapping 4.5.1 Full Feature NAT + Many-to-Many No Overload Mapping Use this setting if your applications can use random public IP addresses and the applications are initiated from the Intranet computers (A and B). For example, VoIP application. See Section 4.5.2 on page 44 if it is not. IP-1 1 2 B C A To configure this:

Click Network > NAT. Select Active Network Address Translation(NAT) and Full Feature in the General screen. Click Apply. 1 2 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 43 Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Click the Address Mapping tab, and then click the Edit icon on a new rule. 4 Configure the rule using the following settings:

Type: Many-to-Many No Overload Local IP addresses: 192.168.1.2 ~ 192.168.1.3 Global IP addresses: 172.16.1.253 ~ 172.16.1.254 Then click Apply. 4.5.2 Full Feature NAT + One-to-One Mapping Use this setting if your applications must use fixed public IP addresses and the applications can be initiated either from the Intranet computers (A and B) or the Internet computer (C). For example, gaming application. IP-1 B C A To configure this setting:

1 Click Network > NAT. 44 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 2 Select Active Network Address Translation(NAT) and Full Feature in the General screen. Click Apply. Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Click the Address Mapping tab, click the Edit icon on a new rule. 4 Configure two rules for the one-to-one mappings:

Rule 1 (This maps the public IP address 172.16.1.253 to the private IP address 192.168.1.2) Type: One-to-One Local Start IP: 192.168.1.2 Global Start IP: 172.16.1.253 Rule 2 (This maps the public IP address 172.16.1.254 to the private IP address 192.168.1.3) Type: One-to-One Local Start IP: 192.168.1.3 Global Start IP: 172.16.1.254 Click Apply on each of the screens. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 45 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.6 Firewall Rule to Allow a Specified Service The following Internet firewall rule example allows a Secure Shell (SSH) connection from the Internet. 1 2 3 4 Click Security > Firewall > Rules. Select WAN to LAN in the Packet Direction field. Figure 9 Firewall Example: Rules In the Rules screen, select the index number after which you want to add the rule. For example, if you select 6, your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 (if there is one) becomes rule 8. Click Add to display the firewall rule configuration screen. 46 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 5 Select Active and in the Action for Matched Packets field, select Permit. Configure the Source and Destination Addresses as follows and click Add >> for each. In the Available Services menu, select SSH(TCP/UDP:22) and click Add >>. Click Apply. Figure 10 Firewall Example: Edit Rule Chapter 4 Tutorials On completing the configuration procedure for this Internet firewall rule, the Rules screen should look like the following. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 47 Chapter 4 Tutorials Rule 1 allows a SSH connection from the WAN IP address 1.1.1.1 to IP address 1.1.1.2. Figure 11 Firewall Example: Rules 4.7 Port BindingConfiguration This tutorial shows you how to configure port binding for WAN connections with different ATM QoS settings for different types of traffic. The port binding feature is used to group each WAN connection with specific LAN ports and WLANs. In this example ATM QoS settings are configured for WAN PVCs for time sensitive VoIP traffic and non-time sensitive data traffic. 4.7.1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections This example shows an application for multiple WAN connections with different ATM QoS Settings. More than one WAN connection on the Device may be configured to record traffic statistics or calculate service charges. Three WAN connections are configured over the ADSL line:

The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/33, is dedicated for general data transmission. The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/34, is dedicated for VoIP service. 1 To configure bandwidth for the WAN connections, access the WAN configuration Advanced Setup screen by clicking Network > WAN. Click Advanced Setup. 48 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 To configure bandwidth for the data connection, select UBR in the ATM QoS Type field. Click Apply to save the settings. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 49 Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 To configure dedicated bandwidth of 400kbps for the VoIP connection, select CBR in the ATM QoS Type field and enter the Peak Cell Rate as 943 (divide the bandwidth 400000 bps by 424). Click Apply to save the settings. Configured WAN connections can be viewed by clicking the More Connections tab under Network

> WAN. See the WAN Setup chapter (Chapter 6 on page 89) for more information on configuring WAN connections and ATM QoS settings. 50 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 4.7.2 Configuring Port Binding Chapter 4 Tutorials You can then group specific WAN PVCs with LAN ports or WLANs, so traffic from these ports is forwarded through specific WAN PVCs. In the configuration shown below, the WAN connections set up in the previous section are bound as follows:

Table 7 Port Binding Groups GROUP INDEX WAN CONNECTION 0 1 LAN PORT eth1, eth2, AP0, AP1, AP2 eth3 PVC0 - for Data PVC1 - for VoIP Access the port binding screen by clicking Advanced > Port Binding, and select Activated to turn on the port binding feature. Specify the Group Index and select the ports to include in the port binding group. Click Apply to save the settings. The configured groups can be viewed by clicking the Port Binding Summary button. See the Port Binding chapter (Chapter 14 on page 195) for more details on configuring port binding. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 51 Chapter 4 Tutorials 52 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide PART II Technical Reference 53 54 CHAPTER 5 Internet Setup Wizard 5.1 Overview Use the wizard setup screens to configure your system for Internet access with the information given to you by your ISP. Note: See the advanced menu chapters for background information on these fields. 5.2 Internet Access Wizard Setup 1 After you enter the password to access the web configurator, select Go to Wizard setup and click Apply. Otherwise, click the wizard icon (

) in the top right corner of the web configurator to go to the wizards. Figure 12 Select a Mode AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 55 Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard 2 Click INTERNET SETUP to configure the system for Internet access and wireless connection. Figure 13 Wizard Welcome 3 Your Device attempts to detect your DSL connection and your connection type. 3a The following screen appears if a connection is not detected. Check your hardware connections and click Restart the INTERNET/WIRELESS SETUP Wizard to return to the wizard welcome screen. If you still cannot connect, click Manually configure your Internet connection. Follow the directions in the wizard and enter your Internet setup information as provided to you by your ISP. See Section 5.2.1 on page 58 for more details. If you would like to skip your Internet setup and configure the wireless LAN settings, leave Yes selected and click Next. Figure 14 Auto Detection: No DSL Connection 56 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard 3b The following screen displays if a PPPoE or PPPoA connection is detected. Enter your Internet account information (username, password and/or service name) exactly as provided by your ISP. Then click Next and see Section 5.3 on page 63 for wireless connection wizard setup. Figure 15 Auto-Detection: PPPoE 3c The following screen appears if the Device detects a connection but not the connection type. Click Next and refer to Section 5.2.1 on page 58 on how to manually configure the Device for Internet access. Figure 16 Auto Detection: Failed AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 57 Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard 5.2.1 Manual Configuration 1 If the Device fails to detect your DSL connection type but the physical line is connected, enter your Internet access information in the wizard screen exactly as your service provider gave it to you. Leave the defaults in any fields for which you were not given information. Figure 17 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 8 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters LABEL Mode DESCRIPTION Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the Device. Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on what you select in the Mode field. If you select Bridge in the Mode field, select either PPPoA or RFC 1483. If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop-down list box either VC-based or LLC-based. VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information. Enter the VPI assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Enter the VCI assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Encapsulation Multiplexing Virtual Circuit ID VPI VCI 58 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard Table 8 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters LABEL Back Next DESCRIPTION Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to continue to the next wizard screen. The next wizard screen you see depends on what protocol you chose above. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Exit 2 The next wizard screen varies depending on what mode and encapsulation type you use. All screens shown are with routing mode. Configure the fields and click Next to continue. See Section 5.3 on page 63 for wireless connection wizard setup Figure 18 Internet Connection with PPPoE AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 59 Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 9 Internet Connection with PPPoE LABEL User Name DESCRIPTION Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. Enter the password associated with the user name above. Type the name of your PPPoE service here. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Password Service Name Back Apply Exit Figure 19 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 60 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 10 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 LABEL IP Address DESCRIPTION This field is available if you select Routing in the Mode field. Back Next Exit Type your ISP assigned IP address in this field. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to continue to the next wizard screen. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Figure 20 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 61 Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 11 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP LABEL Obtain an IP Address Automatically DESCRIPTION A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address. Select Static IP Address if your ISP gave you an IP address to use. Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP address First DNS Server Second DNS Server Back Apply Exit Enter your ISP assigned IP address. Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. Refer to the appendix to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting. You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you use ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen. Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask. As above. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Figure 21 Internet Connection with PPPoA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 12 Internet Connection with PPPoA LABEL User Name Password Back DESCRIPTION Enter the login name that your ISP gives you. Enter the password associated with the user name above. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. 62 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard Table 12 Internet Connection with PPPoA (continued) LABEL Apply Exit DESCRIPTION Click this to save your changes. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. If the user name and/or password you entered for PPPoE or PPPoA connection are not correct, the screen displays as shown next. Click Back to Username and Password setup to go back to the screen where you can modify them. Figure 22 Connection Test Failed-1 If the following screen displays, check if your account is activated or click Restart the Internet/

Wireless Setup Wizard to verify your Internet access settings. Figure 23 Connection Test Failed-2. 5.3 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup After you configure the Internet access information, use the following screens to set up your wireless LAN. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 63 Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard 1 Select Yes and click Next to configure wireless settings. Otherwise, select No and skip to Step 6. Figure 24 Connection Test Successful 2 Use this screen to activate the wireless LAN. Click Next to continue. Figure 25 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1 LABEL Active Back Next Exit DESCRIPTION Select the check box to turn on the wireless LAN. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to continue to the next wizard screen. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. 64 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 3 Configure your wireless settings in this screen. Click Next. Figure 26 Wireless LAN Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 2 LABEL Network Name(SSID) DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. If you change this field on the Device, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g wireless devices is called a channel. Select a channel ID that is not already in use by a neighboring device. Select Manually assign a WPA-PSK key to configure a Pre-Shared Key (WPA-

PSK). Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA. See Section 5.3.1 on page 66 for more information. Select Manually assign a WEP key to configure a WEP Key. See Section 5.3.2 on page 66 for more information. Select Disable wireless security to have no wireless LAN security configured and your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to continue to the next wizard screen. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Channel Selection Security Back Next Exit Note: The wireless stations and Device must use the same SSID, channel ID and WEP encryption key (if WEP is enabled), WPA-PSK (if WPA-PSK is enabled) for wireless communication. 4 This screen varies depending on the security mode you selected in the previous screen. Fill in the field (if available) and click Next. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 65 Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard 5.3.1 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key Choose Manually assign a WPA-PSK key in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre-

Shared Key. Figure 27 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 15 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key LABEL Pre-Shared Key DESCRIPTION Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters. You can set up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. You need to configure an authentication server to do this. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to continue to the next wizard screen. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Back Next Exit 5.3.2 Manually Assign a WEP Key Choose Manually assign a WEP key to setup WEP Encryption parameters. Figure 28 Manually Assign a WEP key 66 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Manually Assign a WEP key LABEL Key DESCRIPTION The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. Enter any 5 or 13 ASCII characters, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-

F") for a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP key respectively. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to continue to the next wizard screen. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Back Next Exit 5 Click Apply to save your wireless LAN settings. Figure 29 Wireless LAN Setup 3 6 Use the read-only summary table to check whether what you have configured is correct. Click Finish to complete and save the wizard setup. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 67 Chapter 5 Internet Setup Wizard Note: No wireless LAN settings display if you chose not to configure wireless LAN settings. Figure 30 Internet Access and WLAN Wizard Setup Complete 7 Launch your web browser and navigate to www.zyxel.com. Internet access is just the beginning. Refer to the rest of this guide for more detailed information on the complete range of Device features. If you cannot access the Internet, open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the wizard setup are correct. 68 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 6 WAN Setup 6.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings from the WAN screens. Use these screens to configure your Device for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 31 LAN and WAN LAN WAN 6.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens Use the Internet Access Setup screen (Section 6.2 on page 71) to configure the WAN settings on the Device for Internet access. Use the More Connections screen (Section 6.3 on page 75) to set up additional Internet access connections. 6.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 69 Chapter 6 WAN Setup WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method). Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just one. IGMP IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. Finding Out More See Section 6.4 on page 80 for technical background information on WAN. 6.1.3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. 70 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 6.2 The Internet Access Setup Screen Use this screen to change your Devices WAN settings. Click Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup. The screen differs by the WAN type and encapsulation you select. Figure 32 Network > WAN >Internet Access Setup (PPPoE) Chapter 6 WAN Setup AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 71 Chapter 6 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 17 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup LABEL Line ADSL Mode DESCRIPTION Select the mode supported by your ISP. Use Auto Sync-Up if you are not sure which mode to choose from. The Device dynamically diagnoses the mode supported by the ISP and selects the best compatible one for your connection. Other options are ADSL2+, ADSL2, G.DMT, T1.413 and G.lite. Select the type supported by your ISP. Available options are ANNEX A, ANNEX I, ANNEX A/L, ANNEX M and ANNEX A/

I/J/L/M. Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP gives you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the Device. Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field. If you select Bridge in the Mode field, the encapsulation type is RFC 1483. If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE.

(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.

(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the password associated with the user name above.

(PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here. Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are VC or LLC. VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. If the encapsulation in PPPoE, you can enable or disable PPPoE passthrough. Select the IP version specified by your ISP. This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address;

otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below. Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. Specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP). ADSL Type General Mode Encapsulation User Name Password Service Name Multiplexing Virtual Circuit ID VPI VCI PPPoE Passthrough IP Version IPv4 address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IPv6 address 72 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 6 WAN Setup Table 17 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup (continued) LABEL IPv6 Message Fetch Type DHCP IPv6 Enable DESCRIPTION If the encapsulation type is ENET ENCAP, you can select Dynamic Mode to automatically obtain an IP address or Static Mode to enter a static IP address. Select DHCP if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. DHCP PD Enable The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the Device using the IPv6 prefix from an RA. Select SLAAC (Stateless address autoconfiguration) to have the Device use the prefix to automatically generate a unique IP address that does not need to be maintained by a DHCP server. Select Enable to use DHCP PD (Prefix Delegation) to allow the Device to pass the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. Enter the IPv6 address assigned by your ISP. IPv6 Address IPv6 Default Gateway Enter the gateway IPv6 address provided by your ISP. IPv6 DNS Server1 IPv6 DNS Server2 MLD Proxy Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Select Enable to have the Device act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows the Device to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Connection (PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Keep Alive Connect Manually Apply Reset Advanced Setup Select Keep Alive when you want your connection up all the time. The Device will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected. Select Connect Manually when you don't want the connection up all the time, and would prefer to connect manually. You can activate the connection by clicking the Connect button on the Status screen. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to display the Advanced WAN Setup screen and edit more details of your WAN setup. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 73 Chapter 6 WAN Setup 6.2.1 Advanced Internet Access Setup Use this screen to edit your Device's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in the Internet Access Setup screen. The screen appears as shown. Figure 33 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup LABEL RIP & Multicast Setup RIP Direction DESCRIPTION RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. Use this field to control how much routing information the Device sends and receives on the subnet. Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only. This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field. Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B/RIP-2M. Select RIP-1 to use RIP version 1. Select RIP-2B/RIP-2M to use RIP version 2 broadcast and multicast. Multicast packets are sent to a group of computers on the LAN and are an alternative to unicast packets (packets sent to one computer) and broadcast packets (packets sent to every computer). Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The Device supports IGMP-v1 and IGMP-v2. Select None to disable it. RIP Version Multicast ATM QoS 74 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 6 WAN Setup Table 18 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup (continued) LABEL ATM QoS Type DESCRIPTION Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select rtVBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select nrtVBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field. For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500. For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492. For PPPoA and RFC 1483, the MTU is 100-1500. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size MTU MTU Back Apply Reset 6.3 The More Connections Screen The Device allows you to configure more than one Internet access connection. To configure additional Internet access connections click Network > WAN > More Connections. The screen differs by the encapsulation you select. When you use the WAN > Internet Access Setup screen to set up Internet access, you are configuring the first WAN connection. Figure 34 Network > WAN > More Connections AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 75 Chapter 6 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Network > WAN > More Connections LABEL

Active DESCRIPTION This is an index number indicating the number of the corresponding connection. This field indicates whether the connection is active or not. Name VPI/VCI Encapsulation Modify Clear the check box to disable the connection. Select the check box to enable it. This is the name you gave to the Internet connection. This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers configured for this WAN connection. This field indicates the encapsulation method of the Internet connection. The first (ISP) connection is read-only in this screen. Use the WAN > Internet Access Setup screen to edit it. Click the Edit icon to edit the Internet connection settings. Click this icon on an empty configuration to add a new Internet access setup. Click the Remove icon to delete the Internet access setup from your connection list. 76 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 6.3.1 More Connections Edit Use this screen to configure a connection. Click the edit icon in the More Connections screen to display the following screen. Figure 35 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit Chapter 6 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit LABEL General Active DESCRIPTION Name Mode Select the check box to activate or clear the check box to deactivate this connection. Enter a unique, descriptive name of up to 13 ASCII characters for this connection. Select Route from the drop-down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account. If you select Bridge, the Device will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node; otherwise, the packets are discarded. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 77 Chapter 6 WAN Setup Table 20 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit (continued) LABEL Encapsulation DESCRIPTION Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field. If you select Bridge in the Mode field, the encapsulation type is RFC 1483. If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are VC or LLC. By prior agreement, a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit, for example, VC1 will carry IP. If you select VC, specify separate VPI and VCI numbers for each protocol. For LLC-based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation, one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. In this case, only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. This option is available if you select Route in the Mode field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. If you use the encapsulation type except RFC 1483, select Obtain an IP Address Automatically when you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below. If you use RFC 1483, enter the IP address given by your ISP in the IP Address field. This option is available if you select ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field. Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. This option is available if you select ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field. Specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP). Select Nailed-Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time. The Device will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected. Select Connect on Demand when you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field. Specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand. The default setting is 0, which means the Internet session will not timeout. SUA only is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field. Select SUA Only if you have one public IP address and want to use NAT. Click Edit Detail to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a server mapping set. Otherwise, select None to disable NAT. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Multiplexing VPI VCI IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Connection Nailed-Up Connection Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout NAT Back 78 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 6 WAN Setup Table 20 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit (continued) LABEL Apply Advanced Setup DESCRIPTION Click this to save your changes. Click this to display the More Connections Advanced Setup screen and edit more details of your WAN setup. 6.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup Use this screen to edit your Device's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in the More Connections Edit screen. The screen appears as shown. Figure 36 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup LABEL RIP & Multicast Setup RIP Direction DESCRIPTION RIP Version ATM QoS Type ATM QoS Peak Cell Rate RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. Use this field to control how much routing information the Device sends and receives on the subnet. Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only. This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field. Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP-2M. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select nrtVBR (Variable Bit Rate-non Real Time) or rtVBR (Variable Bit Rate-Real Time) for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications. Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 79 Chapter 6 WAN Setup Table 21 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup (continued) LABEL Sustain Cell Rate DESCRIPTION The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. Maximum Burst Size MTU MTU Back Apply Reset The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field. For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500. For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492. For PPPoA and RFC, the MTU is 100-1500. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 6.4 WAN Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 6.4.1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Device supports the following methods. 6.4.1.1 ENET ENCAP The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) is only implemented with the IP network protocol. IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells. ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the Gateway IP Address field in the wizard or WAN screen. You can get this information from your ISP. 6.4.1.2 PPP over Ethernet The Device supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard

(RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. 80 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 6 WAN Setup Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. 6.4.1.3 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Providers (ISP) DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Access Multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP. 6.4.1.4 RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5

(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit

(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information. 6.4.2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. VC-based Multiplexing In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. 6.4.3 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information. 6.4.4 IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 81 Chapter 6 WAN Setup either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway. IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable

(N/A). If you have a static IP, then you need to fill in the IP Address field, the Subnet mask and the Gateway IP Address field. IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation In this case the IP address assignment must be static. IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP. For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields as supplied by your ISP. However for a dynamic IP, the Device acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable (N/A) as the DHCP server assigns them to the Device. 6.4.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) A nailed-up connection is a dial-up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand. The Device does two things when you specify a nailed-up connection. The first is that idle timeout is disabled. The second is that the Device will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down. A nailed-up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons. Do not specify a nailed-up connection unless your telephone company offers flat-rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern. 6.4.6 NAT NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 6.5 Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. 82 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 6 WAN Setup Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 37 Example of Traffic Shaping 6.5.1 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time

(VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 83 Chapter 6 WAN Setup The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers. Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer. 84 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 7 LAN Setup 7.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. LAN DSL 7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens Use the LAN IP screen (Section 7.2 on page 86) to set the LAN IP address and subnet mask of your Device. You can also edit your Device's RIP, multicast and Windows Networking settings from this screen. Use the DHCP Server screen (Section 7.3 on page 88) to configure the Devices DHCP settings. Use the Client List screen (Section 7.4 on page 89) to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Use the IP Alias screen (Section 7.5 on page 90) to change your Devices IP alias settings. Use the IPv6 screen (Section 7.6 on page 92) to configure the IPv6 settings on your Devices LAN interface. 7.1.2 What You Need To Know About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 85 Chapter 7 LAN Setup Subnet Mask Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. DHCP A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your Device an IP address, subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on. RIP RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. IGMP IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it. Finding Out More See Section 7.7 on page 93 for technical background information on LANs. 7.1.3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. 7.2 The LAN IP Screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device. Click Network > LAN to open the IP screen. Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings. 86 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup 1 2 3 Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation. This will become the IP address of your Device. Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP address you entered. Click Apply to save your settings. Figure 38 Network > LAN > IP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 22 Network > LAN > IP LABEL IP Address DESCRIPTION Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to display the Advanced LAN Setup screen and edit more details of your LAN setup. IP Subnet Mask Apply Cancel Advanced Setup 7.2.1 The Advanced LAN IP Setup Screen Use this screen to edit your Device's RIP, multicast and Windows Networking settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in the LAN IP screen. The screen appears as shown. Figure 39 Network > LAN > IP: Advanced Setup AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 87 Chapter 7 LAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 23 Network > LAN > IP: Advanced Setup LABEL RIP & Multicast Setup RIP Direction RIP Version IGMP Snoop DESCRIPTION Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only. Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP-2M. Select Enabled to activate IGMP Snooping. This allows the Device to passively learn memberships in multicast groups. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Back Apply Cancel 7.3 The DHCP Server Screen Use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN. Click Network > DHCP Server to open this screen. Figure 40 Network > LAN > DHCP Server 88 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 24 Network > LAN > DHCP Server LABEL DHCP Server DHCP DESCRIPTION If set to Server, your Device can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95, Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client. If set to None, the DHCP server will be disabled. If set to Relay, the Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case. IP Pool Starting Address Pool Size Remote DHCP Server DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server DNS Relay Primary /Secondary DNS Server Apply Cancel When DHCP is used, the following items need to be set:

This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool. If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server here. The Device passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address to the DHCP clients. Select Automatically to have the Device act as a DNS proxy if your ISP uses IPCP DNS server extensions. The Device tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the Device itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the Device, the Device forwards the query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer. Select Manually to specify the DNS server IP address manually. Enter the IP address of your primary/secondary DNS server. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 7.4 The Client List Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 89 Chapter 7 LAN Setup Use this screen to change your Devices static DHCP settings. Click Network > LAN > Client List to open the following screen. Figure 41 Network > LAN > Client List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Network > LAN > Client List LABEL IP Address DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify. Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN. Click this to add a static DHCP entry. This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row). This field displays whether the client is connected to the Device. This field displays the computer host name. This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. Select the check box in the heading row to automatically select all check boxes or select the check box(es) in each entry to have the Device always assign the selected entry(ies)s IP address(es) to the corresponding MAC address(es) (and host name(s)). You can select up to 10 entries in this table. Click the modify icon to have the IP address field editable and change it. Click this to save your changes. MAC Address Add

Status Host Name IP Address MAC Address Reserve Modify Apply 7.5 The IP Alias Screen IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The Device supports logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Device itself as the gateway for each LAN network. 90 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access between the LAN's logical networks (subnets). Note: Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do overlap. The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A, B, and C. Figure 42 Physical Network & Partitioned Logical Networks Ethernet Interface A: 192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.24 B: 192.168.2.1 - 192.168.2.24 C: 192.168.3.1 - 192.168.3.24 7.5.1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen Use this screen to change your Devices IP alias settings. Click Network > LAN > IP Alias to open the following screen. Figure 43 Network > LAN > IP Alias The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Network > LAN > IP Alias LABEL IP Alias IP Address DESCRIPTION Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the Device. Enter the IP address of your Device in dotted decimal notation. IP Subnet Mask Apply Cancel Alternatively, click the right mouse button to copy and/or paste the IP address. Your Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the Device. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 91 Chapter 7 LAN Setup 7.6 The IPv6 Screen Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings for your Devices LAN interface. See Appendix E on page 281 for background information about IPv6. Figure 44 Network > LAN > IPv6 The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 27 Network > LAN > IPv6 LABEL DESCRIPTION Radvd Setup Radvd Enable Select Enable to have the Device send router advertisement messages to the LAN hosts. Router advertisement is a response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters, such as IPv6 prefix and DNS information. Router solicitation is a request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets. Note: The LAN hosts neither generate global IPv6 addresses nor communicate with other networks if you disable this feature. If Auto is selected, the Device will pass IPv6 prefix and DNS information in router advertisements. If Mannual is selected, you can specify the IPv6 network prefix information for router advertisement. If manual router advertisement mode is selected, specify the IPv6 prefix and prefix length to pass to hosts. Enter the preferred lifetime for the prefix. Enter the valid lifetime for the prefix. Radvd Mode Prefix / Length Preferred Lifetime Valid Lifetime 92 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup LABEL DHCP6 Setup DHCP6 Server DHCP6 Mode Prefix/Length Preferred Lifetime Valid Lifetime Primary DNS Secondary DNS Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Select Enable to have the Device act as a DHCP6 server and pass IPv6 Prefix and DNS information to clients. Select Auto if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 Prefix and DNS information. Select Mannual to configure these parameters manually. If manual DHCP6 mode is selected, specify the IPv6 prefix and prefix length to pass to clients. Enter the preferred lifetime for the prefix. Enter the valid lifetime for the prefix. Enter the first DNS server IP address the Device passes to the DHCP clients. Enter the second DNS server IP address the Device passes to the DHCP clients. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 7.7 LAN Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 7.7.1 LANs, WANs and the Device The actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 45 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN 7.7.2 DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 93 Chapter 7 LAN Setup IP Pool Setup The Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. 7.7.3 DNS Server Addresses DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen. Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Device supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature. Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen. 7.7.4 LAN TCP/IP The Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Device. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. 94 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 7 LAN Setup Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;

always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 7.7.5 RIP Setup RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. When set to:

Both - the Device will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives. In Only - the Device will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received. Out Only - the Device will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received. None - the Device will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received. The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported; but RIP-

2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 95 Chapter 7 LAN Setup 7.7.6 Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. IGMP version 3 supports source filtering, reporting or ignoring traffic from specific source address to a particular host on the network. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts

(including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. The Device supports IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-v2). At start up, the Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the Device periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the Device LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces. 96 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 8 Wireless LAN 8.1 Overview This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing your wireless network, including the following. Turning the wireless connection on or off. Configuring a name, wireless channel and security for the network. Using WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) to configure your wireless network. Setting up multiple wireless networks. Using a MAC (Media Access Control) address filter to restrict access to the wireless network. Setting up a Wireless Distribution System (WDS). Performing other performance-related wireless tasks. 8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens This section describes the Devices Network > Wireless LAN screens. Use these screens to set up your Devices wireless connection. Use the AP screen (see Section 8.2 on page 99) to turn the wireless connection on or off, set up wireless security, configure the MAC filter, and make other basic configuration changes. Use the More AP screen (see Section 8.3 on page 106) to set up multiple wireless networks on your Device. Use the WPS screen (see Section 8.4 on page 108) to enable or disable WPS, generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information about the Devices WPS status. Use the WPS Station (see Section 8.5 on page 109) screen to set up WPS by pressing a button or using a PIN. Use the WDS screen (see Section 8.6 on page 110) to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the Device acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points. Use the Scheduling screen (see Section 8.7 on page 112) to configure the dates/times to enable or disable the wireless LAN. You dont necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection. For example, you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless radio channel and security in the AP screen. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 97 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption. SSID Each network must have a name, referred to as the SSID - Service Set IDentifier. The service set is the network, so the service set identifier is the networks name. This helps you identify your wireless network when wireless networks coverage areas overlap and you have a variety of networks to choose from. MAC Address Filter Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address consists of twelve hexadecimal characters (0-9, and A to F), and it is usually written in the following format:

0A:A0:00:BB:CC:DD. The MAC address filter controls access to the wireless network. You can use the MAC address of each wireless client to allow or deny access to the wireless network. Finding Out More See Section 8.8 on page 112 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. 8.1.3 Before You Start Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See Section 8.1.2 on page 98 if some of the terms used here are not familiar to you. What wireless standards do the other wireless devices in your network support (IEEE 802.11g, for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use?

What security options do the other wireless devices in your network support (WPA-PSK, for example)? What is the strongest security option supported by all the devices in your network?

Do the other wireless devices in your network support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you can set up a well-secured network very easily. Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this is somewhat more complicated to do. What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to configure advanced options such as Quality of Service, ensure that you know precisely what you want to do. If you do not want to configure advanced options, leave them as they are. 98 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.2 The AP Screen Use this screen to configure the wireless settings of your Device. Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the AP screen. Figure 46 Network > Wireless LAN > AP DESCRIPTION The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > AP LABEL Wireless Setup Enable Wireless LAN Channel Selection Common Setup Network Name

(SSID) Click the check box to activate wireless LAN. Select the country in which you are using the device. Set the operating frequency/channel. Select Auto to automatically scan for a channel. The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. Note: If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Devices SSID or WEP settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Devices new settings. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. See the following sections for more details about this field. This shows whether the wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed or denied to access the Device using this SSID. Click this to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure MAC filter settings. See Section 8.2.6 on page 106 for more details. Select this check box to activate Quality of Service (QoS). Click this to save your changes. Hide SSID Security Mode MAC Filter Edit QoS Apply AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 99 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > AP LABEL Cancel Advanced Setup Click this to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit more details of your DESCRIPTION Click this to restore your previously saved settings. WLAN setup. See Section 8.2.5 on page 104 for more details. 8.2.1 No Security In the Network > Wireless LAN > AP screen, select No Security from the Security Mode list to allow wireless devices to communicate with the Device without any data encryption or authentication. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 47 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: No Security LABEL Security Mode DESCRIPTION Choose No Security from the drop-down list box. 8.2.2 WEP Encryption Use this screen to configure and enable WEP encryption. Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the AP screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list. 100 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available. Figure 48 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Static WEP The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Static WEP LABEL Security Mode Passphrase DESCRIPTION Choose Static WEP from the drop-down list box. Enter a passphrase (up to 32 printable characters) and click Generate. The Device automatically generates a WEP key. The WEP key is used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. WEP Key If you want to manually set the WEP key, enter any 5 or 13 characters (ASCII string) or 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP key respectively. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 101 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.2.3 WPA(2)-PSK Use this screen to configure and enable WPA(2)-PSK authentication. Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the AP screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 49 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)-PSK The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL Security Mode Encryption DESCRIPTION Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. If the security mode is WPA-PSK, you can set the encryption mode to TKIP to enable Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) security on your wireless network. If the security mode is WPA2-PSK, you can set the encryption mode to AES to enable Advanced Encryption System (AES) security on your wireless network. AES provides superior security to TKIP. If the security mode is WPA2-PSK and WPA Compatible is selected, you can set the encryption mode to TKIP/AES to allow both TKIP and AES types of security in your wireless network. This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK in the Security Mode field. Select the check box to have both WPA-PSK wireless clients be able to communicate with the Device even when the Device is using WPA2-PSK. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols). The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA(2)-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA(2) key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA(2) equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. WPA Compatible Pre-Shared Key WPA Group Key Update Timer 102 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication Use this screen to configure and enable WPA or WPA2 authentication. Click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the AP screen. Select WPA, WPA2 or WPAMixed from the Security Mode list. Figure 50 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2) The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2) LABEL Security Mode Encryption DESCRIPTION Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box. If the security mode is WPA-PSK, you can set the encryption mode to TKIP to enable Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) security on your wireless network. If the security mode is WPA2-PSK, you can set the encryption mode to AES to enable Advanced Encryption System (AES) security on your wireless network. AES provides superior security to TKIP. If the security mode is WPA2-PSK and WPA Compatible is selected, you can set the encryption mode to TKIP/AES to allow both TKIP and AES types of security in your wireless network. This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK or WPA2 in the Security Mode field. WPA Compatible ReAuthentication Timer Select the check box to have both WPA-PSK and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the Device even when the Device is using WPA2-PSK or WPA2. Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds. Idle Timeout WPA Group Key Update Timer Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. The Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA(2)-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA(2) key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA(2) equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 103 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2) LABEL Authentication Server DESCRIPTION IP Address Port Number Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Enter the port number of the external authentication server. Shared Secret You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the Device. The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Device. The key is not sent over the network. 8.2.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in the AP screen. The screen appears as shown. See Section 8.8.2 on page 114 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen. Figure 51 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Advanced Setup LABEL Wireless Advanced Setup DESCRIPTION RTS/CTS Threshold Fragmentation Threshold Output Power Enter a value between 0 and 2347. This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2346. Set the output power of the Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following:

100%, 75%, 50% or 25%. 104 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Advanced Setup LABEL Preamble 802.11 Mode DESCRIPTION Select a preamble type from the drop-down list menu. Choices are Long or Short. See the Appendix D on page 271 for more information. Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. Select 802.11b+g to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced. Select 802.11n to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. Select 802.11g+n to allow either IEEE 802.11g or IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced. Select 802.11b+g+n to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced. 11n Settings Channel Bandwidth Extension Channel Select whether the Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or Auto. If Auto is selected, the Device will use 40MHz if it is supported. A 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers faster speeds. 40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. This field is available only when you set the Wireless Mode to 802.11n or 802.11b+g+n. When a channel bandwidth of 40Mhz is used, select if the secondary channel is bonded above the 20Mhz channel (above the control channel) or below the 20Mhz channel

(below the control channel). Guard Interval Specify the time interval between transmissions. A shorter guard interval can increase MCS Back Apply Cancel data rate, but may increase transmission errors. Select the Modulation Coding Scheme (MCS) index value to set modulation and coding, with a higher index being capable of higher data rates. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 105 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.2.6 MAC Filter Use this screen to change your Devices MAC filter settings. Click the Edit button in the AP screen. The screen appears as shown. Figure 52 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: MAC Address Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: MAC Address Filter LABEL Enable MAC Filter Filter Action DESCRIPTION Select the check box to enable MAC address filtering. Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Deny to block access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the Device Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device. This is the index number of the MAC address. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Set MAC Address Back Apply Reset 8.3 The More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the Device. 106 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Click Network > Wireless LAN > More AP. The following screen displays. Figure 53 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP LABEL

Active SSID DESCRIPTION This is the index number of each SSID profile. This field indicates whether this SSID is active. An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Devices BSSs. The SSID

(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. Security Modify Click 8.3.1 More AP Edit Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen. The following screen displays. Figure 54 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP: Edit AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 107 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP: Edit LABEL Network Name (SSID) DESCRIPTION The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. Note: If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Devices SSID or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Devices new settings. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. See Section 8.2 on page 99 for more details about this field. This shows whether the wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed or denied to access the Device using this SSID. Click this to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure MAC filter settings. See Section 8.2.6 on page 106 for more details. Select this check box to activate Quality of Service (QoS). Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Hide SSID Security Mode MAC Filter Edit QoS Back Apply Reset 8.4 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your Device. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. 108 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS. The following screen displays. Figure 55 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS LABEL WPS Setup Enable WPS PIN Number DESCRIPTION Select the check box to activate WPS on the Device. This shows the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the Device. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. Generate WPS Status Release Apply Refresh The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. Click this to have the Device create a new PIN. This displays Configured when the Device has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the Device or you click Release to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. This button is available when the WPS status is Configured. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the Device. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 8.5 The WPS Station Screen Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network using either Push Button Configuration (PBC) or PIN Configuration. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 109 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station. The following screen displays. Figure 56 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station LABEL Push Button DESCRIPTION Click this to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Push Button on this screen. Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Or input station's PIN number Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Start to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the Device. 8.6 The WDS Screen An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments. The WDS screen allows you to configure the Device to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled. Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the Device and other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the Device and any wireless clients. Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models support WDS links. Check your other APs documentation. 110 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Click Network > Wireless LAN > WDS. The following screen displays. Figure 57 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS LABEL WDS Security DESCRIPTION Select the type of the key used to encrypt data between APs. All the wireless APs

(including the Device) must use the same pre-shared key for data transmission. The option is available only when you set the security mode to WPA(2) or WPA(2)-

PSK in the Wireless LAN > AP screen. Select this to use TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) encryption. Select this to use AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption. This is the index number of the individual WDS link. Select this to activate the link between the Device and the peer device to which this entry refers. When you do not select the check box this link is down. Type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc). Enter a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols). Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. TKIP AES

Active Remote Bridge MAC Address PSK Apply Cancel AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 111 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.7 The Scheduling Screen Use the wireless LAN scheduling to configure the days you want to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Click Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling. The following screen displays. Figure 58 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling DESCRIPTION Select this box to activate wireless LAN scheduling on your Device. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS LABEL Enable Wireless LAN Scheduling Action Day The following times Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Check the day(s) you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off. Specify a time frame during which the schedule would apply. Apply Reset For example, if you set the time range from 12:00 to 23:00, the wireless LAN will be turned on only during this time period. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 8.8 Wireless LAN Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix. 112 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 8.8.1 Wireless Network Overview Chapter 8 Wireless LAN Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 59 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your Device is the AP. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 113 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. 8.8.2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Devices Web Configurator. Table 41 Additional Wireless Terms TERM RTS/CTS Threshold DESCRIPTION In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each others presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through. By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the Device. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission. If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device. A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device does, it cannot communicate with the Device. The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. Preamble Authentication Fragmentation Threshold 8.8.3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. 114 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a key phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attackers software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary. Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, its not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key. The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 8.8.3.1 SSID Normally, the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 8.8.3.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, cannot detect wireless networks but can use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 115 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 8.8.3.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 8.8.3.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 8.8.3.3 on page 116 for information about this.) Table 42 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest NO AUTHENTICATION No Security Static WEP WPA-PSK RADIUS SERVER WPA Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your Device, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some 116 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the Device. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. 8.8.4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. 8.8.5 BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 60 Basic Service set AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 117 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 8.8.6 MBSSID Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The Devices MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs. Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP. 8.8.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously. You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs

(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each others communications (but not communicate with each other). MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security. 8.8.7 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) The Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to your other access points documentation for details. The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2. Figure 61 WDS Link Example A WDS AP 1 AP 2 8.8.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two 118 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 8.8.8.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 2 3 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the Device, see Section 8.5 on page 109). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds. 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name

(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 8.8.8.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router

(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 1 2 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 119 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 3 4 5 6 Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the Device, see Section 8.4 on page 108). Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. 7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 120 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 62 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:

WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 8.8.8.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 121 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. Figure 63 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. 8.8.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 122 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. Figure 64 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 65 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 123 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. Figure 66 WPS: Example Network Step 3 CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O G C T I N X I S E SECURITY INFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP2 8.8.8.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). 124 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Wireless LAN When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 125 Chapter 8 Wireless LAN 126 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 9.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Device. NAT (Network Address Translation -

NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 9.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens Use the NAT General Setup screen (Section 9.2 on page 128) to configure the NAT setup settings. Use the Port Forwarding screen (Section 9.3 on page 129) to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. Use the Address Mapping screen (Section 9.4 on page 133) to change your Devices address mapping settings. Use the ALG screen (Section 9.5 on page 135) to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device. 9.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT Inside/Outside Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/Local Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. NAT In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber

(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 127 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT SUA (Single User Account) is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping, Many-to-One and Server. The Device also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types as outlined in Table 50 on page 139. Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Device. Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Device. Finding Out More See Section 9.6 on page 136 for advanced technical information on NAT. 9.2 The NAT General Setup Screen Use this screen to activate NAT. Click Network > NAT to open the following screen. Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA/NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the Device. Figure 67 Network > NAT > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 Network > NAT > General LABEL Active Network Address Translation SUA Only Full Feature DESCRIPTION Select this check box to enable NAT. Select this radio button if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Device. Select this radio button if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Device. 128 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 43 Network > NAT > General (continued) LABEL Max NAT/Firewall Session Per User DESCRIPTION When computers use peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, they need to establish NAT sessions. If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish, this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used. In this case, no additional NAT sessions can be established, and users may not be able to access the Internet. Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session. Use this field to limit the number of NAT/Firewall sessions client computers can establish through the Device. If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of NAT sessions they can establish. If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications, you can lower this number to ensure no single client is exhausting all of the available NAT sessions. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 9.3 The Port Forwarding Screen Note: This screen is available only when you select SUA only in the NAT > General screen. Use this screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix F on page 291. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Default Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 129 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 68 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 LAN WAN B=192.168.1.34 192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP C=192.168.1.35 D=192.168.1.36 9.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen Click Network > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen. See Appendix F on page 291 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Figure 69 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding 130 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 44 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL Default Server Setup Default Server DESCRIPTION In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup. In this field, you can change the IP address of the default server. Select a service from the drop-down list box. Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service. Click this button to add a rule to the table below. This is the rule index number (read-only). This field indicates whether the rule is active or not. Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. This is a services name. This is the first port number that identifies a service. This is the last port number that identifies a service. This is the start/end port number that the device translates. This is the servers IP address. Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule. Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Change to Server Port Forwarding Service Name Server IP Address Add

Active Service Name Start Port End Port Port Translation Start/End Port Server IP Address Modify Back Apply Cancel AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 131 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 9.3.2 The Port Forwarding Rule Edit Screen Use this screen to edit a port forwarding rule. Click the rules edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to display the screen shown next. Figure 70 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding: Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 45 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding: Edit LABEL Rule Setup Active Service Name Start Port DESCRIPTION Click this check box to enable the rule. Enter a name to identify this port-forwarding rule. Enter a port number in this field. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field. End Port Server IP Address Port Translation Start / End Port Back Apply Cancel To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field. Enter a port number in this field. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above. Enter the inside IP address of the server here. Enter the start port number here to which you want the device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, you only need to enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated, the device automatically calculates the last port of the translated port range. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 132 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 9.4 The Address Mapping Screen Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Note: The Address Mapping screen is available only when you select Full Feature in the NAT > General screen. Ordering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the Device takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule, your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules. For example, if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9. In the set summary screen, the new rule will be rule 7, not 9. Now if you delete rule 4, rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule, so old rules 5, 6 and 7 become new rules 4, 5 and 6. To change your Devices address mapping settings, click Network > NAT > Address Mapping to open the following screen. Figure 71 Network > NAT > Address Mapping The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 46 Network > NAT > Address Mapping LABEL

Local Start IP DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number. This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local IP addresses are N/A for Server port mapping. This is the end Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is N/A for One-to-one and Server mapping types. This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for Many-to-One and Server mapping types. This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-one, Many-to-One and Server mapping types. Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 133 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 46 Network > NAT > Address Mapping (continued) LABEL Type DESCRIPTION 1-1: One-to-one mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type. M-1: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL's Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only. M-M Ov (Overload): Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. MM No (No Overload): Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses. Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule. Modify Click the delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. 9.4.1 The Address Mapping Rule Edit Screen Use this screen to edit an address mapping rule. Click the rules edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next. Figure 72 Network > NAT > Address Mapping: Edit 134 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 47 Network > NAT > Address Mapping: Edit LABEL Type DESCRIPTION Choose the port mapping type from one of the following. One-to-One: One-to-One mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL's Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only. Many-to-Many Overload: Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Many-to-Many No Overload: Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses. Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. This is the starting local IP address (ILA). Local IP addresses are N/A for Server port mapping. This is the end local IP address (ILA). If your rule is for all local IP addresses, then enter 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is N/A for One-to-One and Server mapping types. This is the starting global IP address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. This is the ending global IP address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-One, Many-to-

One and Server mapping types. Click this link to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a port forwarding set that you have selected in the Server Mapping Set field. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Local Start IP Address Local End IP Address Global Start IP Address Global End IP Address Server Mapping Set Edit Details Back Apply Cancel 9.5 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. When the Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the Devices private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your Device is behind a SIP ALG. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 135 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Use this screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device. To access this screen, click Network > NAT > ALG. Figure 73 Network > NAT > ALG The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 48 Network > NAT > ALG LABEL Enable SIP ALG DESCRIPTION Select this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-

mapping rules. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Reset 9.6 NAT Technical Reference This chapter contains more information regarding NAT. 9.6.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 49 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside Outside DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. This refers to the host on the WAN. 136 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 49 NAT Definitions (continued) ITEM Local Global DESCRIPTION This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 9.6.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber

(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-

to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping see Table 50 on page 139), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). 9.6.3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 74 How NAT Works LAN 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.12 SA 192.168.1.10 WAN NAT Table Inside Local IP Address 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.13 Inside Global IP Address IGA 1 IGA 2 IGA 3 IGA 4 SA IGA1 Inside Local Address (ILA) Inside Global Address (IGA) 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.10 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 137 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 9.6.4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP alias) behind the Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. Figure 75 NAT Application With IP Alias 9.6.5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP/port mapping. They are:

One to One: In One-to-One mode, the Device maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Many to One: In Many-to-One mode, the Device maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for instance, PAT, port address translation), ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported (the SUA Only option in todays routers). Many to Many Overload: In Many-to-Many Overload mode, the Device maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Many-to-Many No Overload: In Many-to-Many No Overload mode, the Device maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address. Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. Port numbers do not change for One-to-One and Many-to-Many No Overload NAT mapping types. 138 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table summarizes these types. Table 50 NAT Mapping Types TYPE One-to-One Many-to-One (SUA/PAT) IP MAPPING ILA1 IGA1 ILA1 IGA1 Many-to-Many Overload Many-to-Many No Overload Server ILA2 IGA1 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA1 ILA4 IGA2 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA3 Server 1 IP IGA1 Server 2 IP IGA1 Server 3 IP IGA1 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 139 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 140 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 10 Firewalls 10.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Device firewall. Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:

allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks. blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4). Figure 76 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 10.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens Use the General screen to enable firewall and/or triangle route on the Device, and set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules. Use the Rules screen to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule. 10.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall DoS Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 141 Chapter 10 Firewalls Anti-Probing If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your Device, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the Device exists. The Device supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your Device when unsupported ports are probed. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. 10.2 The Firewall General Screen Use this screen to configure the firewall settings. Click Security > Firewall to display the following screen. Figure 77 Security > Firewall > General 142 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 51 Security > Firewall > General LABEL Active Firewall Bypass Triangle Route DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate the firewall. The Device performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated. If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the Devices LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the Device. This is called an asymmetrical or triangle route. This causes the Device to reset the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged. Select this check box to have the Device permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network (not reset the connection). Note: Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the Device. A better solution is to use IP alias to put the Device and the backup gateway on separate subnets. See Section 10.4.4.1 on page 151 for an example. Packet Direction This is the direction of travel of packets (LAN to Router, LAN to WAN, WAN to Router, WAN to LAN). Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. For example, LAN to Router means packets traveling from a computer/subnet on the LAN to the Device itself. Use the drop-down list boxes to select the default action that the firewall is to take on packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the firewall rules. Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender. Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet (for a TCP packet) or an ICMP destination-unreachable message (for a UDP packet) to the sender. Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets. Click this to display more information. Click this to display less information. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Default Action Expand... Basic... Apply Cancel 10.3 The Firewall Rule Screen Note: The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 143 Chapter 10 Firewalls Click Security > Firewall > Rules to bring up the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured firewall rules. Note the order in which the rules are listed. Figure 78 Security > Firewall > Rules The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Security > Firewall > Rules LABEL Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use Packet Direction DESCRIPTION This read-only bar shows how much of the Device's memory for recording firewall rules it is currently using. When you are using 80% or less of the storage space, the bar is green. When the amount of space used is over 80%, the bar is red. Use the drop-down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for which you want to configure firewall rules. Select an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule after the selected index number. For example, if you select 6, your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 (if there is one) becomes rule 8. The following read-only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction. The firewall rules that you configure

(summarized below) take priority over the general firewall action settings in the General screen. This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn. This field displays whether a firewall is turned on or not. Select the check box to enable the rule. Clear the check box to disable the rule. This drop-down list box displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any. Create a new rule after rule number

Active Source IP 144 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls Table 52 Security > Firewall > Rules (continued) LABEL Destination IP DESCRIPTION This drop-down list box displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any. This drop-down list box displays the services to which this firewall rule applies. This field displays whether the firewall silently discards packets (Drop), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender

(Reject) or allows the passage of packets (Permit). This field tells you whether a schedule is specified (Yes) or not (No). Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing firewall rule. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the firewall rule. Note that subsequent firewall rules move up by one when you take this action. Click the Move icon to display the Move the rule to field. Type a number in the Move the rule to field and click the Move button to move the rule to the number that you typed. The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Service Action Schedule Modify Order Apply Cancel AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 145 Chapter 10 Firewalls 10.3.1 Configuring Firewall Rules Use this screen to configure firewall rules. In the Rules screen, select an index number and click Add or click a rules Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels. Figure 79 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit LABEL Edit Rule Active Action for Matched Packet DESCRIPTION Select this option to enable this firewall rule. Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (Drop), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (Reject) or allow the passage of (Permit) packets that match this rule. Source/Destination Address Address Type Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular (single) IP, a range of IP addresses (for instance, 192.168.1.10 to 192.169.1.50), a subnet or any IP address?

Select an option from the drop-down list box that includes: Single Address, Range Address, Subnet Address and Any Address. 146 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls Table 53 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit (continued) LABEL Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Mask Add >>

DESCRIPTION Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here. Enter the ending IP address in a range here. Enter the subnet mask here, if applicable. Click Add >> to add a new address to the Source or Destination Address box. You can add multiple addresses, ranges of addresses, and/or subnets. To edit an existing source or destination address, select it from the box and click Edit

<<. Highlight an existing source or destination address from the Source or Destination Address box above and click Delete to remove it. Highlight a service from the Available Services box on the left, then click Add >> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. To remove a service, highlight it in the Selected Services box on the right, then click Remove. Click the Edit Customized Services link to bring up the screen that you use to configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Edit <<

Delete Service Available / Selected Services Edit Customized Service Back Apply Cancel 10.3.2 Customized Services Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the Device. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. Click the Edit Customized Services link while editing a firewall rule to configure a custom service port. This displays the following screen. Figure 80 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 147 Chapter 10 Firewalls The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services LABEL No. DESCRIPTION This is the number of your customized port. Click a rules number of a service to go to the Firewall Customized Services Config screen to configure or edit a customized service. This is the name of your customized service. This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) that defines your customized service. This is the port number or range that defines your customized service. Click this to return to the Firewall Edit Rule screen. Name Protocol Port Back 10.3.3 Configuring a Customized Service Use this screen to add a customized rule or edit an existing rule. Click a rule number in the Firewall Customized Services screen to display the following screen. Figure 81 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Config The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Config LABEL Config Service Name Service Type DESCRIPTION Type a unique name for your custom port. Choose the IP port (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) that defines your customized port from the drop down list box. Port Configuration Type Port Number Back Apply Cancel Delete Click Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to delete the current rule. 148 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls 10.4 Firewall Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 10.4.1 Firewall Rules Overview Your customized rules take precedence and override the Devices default settings. The Device checks the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic against the firewall rules (in the order you list them). When the traffic matches a rule, the Device takes the action specified in the rule. Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply:

LAN to Router LAN to WAN WAN to LAN WAN to Router Note: The LAN includes both the LAN port and the WLAN. By default, the Devices stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following directions:

LAN to Router These rules specify which computers on the LAN can manage the Device (remote management). Note: You can also configure the remote management settings to allow only a specific computer to manage the Device. LAN to WAN These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the WAN. By default, the Devices stateful packet inspection drops packets traveling in the following directions:

WAN to LAN These rules specify which computers on the WAN can access which computers or services on the LAN. Note: You also need to configure NAT port forwarding (or full featured NAT address mapping rules) to allow computers on the WAN to access devices on the LAN. WAN to Router By default the Device stops computers on the WAN from managing the Device. You could configure one of these rules to allow a WAN computer to manage the Device. Note: You also need to configure the remote management settings to allow a WAN computer to manage the Device. You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 149 Chapter 10 Firewalls For example, you may create rules to:

Block certain types of traffic, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the LAN to the Internet. Allow certain types of traffic, such as Lotus Notes database synchronization, from specific hosts on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN. Allow everyone except your competitors to access a web server. Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the LAN. These custom rules work by comparing the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator. Your customized rules take precedence and override the Devices default rules. 10.4.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 1 2 3 Change the default password via web configurator. Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way. Limit who can access your router. 4 Don't enable any local service (such as telnet or FTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. 5 6 7 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. 10.4.3 Security Considerations Note: Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security risks to the Device and your protected network. Use caution when creating or deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them. Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule:

1 Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet? For example, if IRC is blocked, are there users that require this service?

2 Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific? For example, if IRC is blocked for all users, will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective?

3 Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability? For example, if FTP ports (TCP 20, 21) are allowed from the Internet to the LAN, Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers. 4 Does this rule conflict with any existing rules?

150 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls Once these questions have been answered, adding rules is simply a matter of entering the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens. 10.4.4 Triangle Route When the firewall is on, your Device acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the Internet. In an ideal network topology, all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through the Device to protect your LAN against attacks. Figure 82 Ideal Firewall Setup LAN 1 2 WAN 10.4.4.1 The Triangle Route Problem A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices. You may have more than one connection to the Internet (through one or more ISPs). If an alternate gateway is on the LAN (and its IP address is in the same subnet as the Devices LAN IP address), the triangle route (also called asymmetrical route) problem may occur. The steps below describe the triangle route problem. 1 2 3 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN. The Device reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway A on the LAN to the WAN. The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the Device. As a result, the Device resets the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged. Figure 83 Triangle Route Problem LAN 1 3 2 WAN ISP 1 ISP 2 A AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 151 Chapter 10 Firewalls 10.4.4.2 Solving the Triangle Route Problem If you have the Device allow triangle route sessions, traffic from the WAN can go directly to a LAN computer without passing through the Device and its firewall protection. Another solution is to use IP alias. IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections over the same Ethernet interface. Your Device supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the Device being the gateway for each logical network. Its like having multiple LAN networks that actually use the same physical cables and ports. By putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass through the Device to your LAN. The following steps describe such a scenario. A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN. The Device reroutes the packet to Gateway A, which is in Subnet 2. The reply from the WAN goes to the Device. The Device then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1. Figure 84 IP Alias LAN Subnet 1 WAN 1 2 3 4 1 4 2 ISP 1 ISP 2 Subnet 2 3 A 152 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Filters 11.1 Overview This chapter introduces three types of filters supported by the Device. You can configure rules to restrict traffic by IP addresses, MAC addresses, application types and/or URLs. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens Use the URL Filter screen (Section 11.2 on page 154) to block access to web sites. Use the Application Filter screen (Section 11.3 on page 154) to allow or deny traffic from certain types of applications. Use the IP/MAC Filter screen (Section 11.4 on page 156) to create IP/MAC filter rules. 11.1.2 What You Need to Know About Filtering URL The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) identifies and helps locates resources on a network. On the Internet the URL is the web address that you type in the address bar of your Internet browser, for example http://www.zyxel.com. IP/MAC Filter Structure An IP/MAC filter set consists of one or more filter rules. The Device allows you to configure each type of filter with its own set of filter rules. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 153 Chapter 11 Filters 11.2 The URL Filter Screen Use this screen to block websites by URL. Click Security > Filter > URL Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 85 Security > Filter > URL Filter DESCRIPTION The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Access Management > Filter (URL) LABEL URL Filter Editing URL Filter URL Index Individual active URL URL Filter Listing Index URL Save Delete Cancel This is the index number of the filter rule. This is the URL you have configured the Device to block. Click this to save your changes. Click this to remove the filter rule. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Use this field to enable or disable the URL filter. Select the index number of the filter. Select Yes to make the filter active and No to make it inactive. Enter the URL for the Device to block. 11.3 The Application Filter Screen Use this screen to allow or deny traffic for certain types of applications. The application filter provides a convenient way to manage the use of various applications on the network. 154 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Click Security > Filter > Application Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 86 Security > Filter > Application Filter Chapter 11 Filters DESCRIPTION The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Access Management > Filter (Application) LABEL Application Filter Editing Application Filter ICQ MSN YMSG Real Audio/Video Save Cancel Use this field to enable or disable the application filter. Use this field to allow or deny ICQ traffic. Use this field to allow or deny MSN traffic. Use this field to allow or deny Yahoo Messenger traffic Use this field to allow or deny transferring RealPlayer format files. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 155 Chapter 11 Filters 11.4 The IP/MAC Filter Screen Use this screen to create and apply IP/MAC filters. Click Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 87 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter DESCRIPTION The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Access Management > Filter (IP/MAC) LABEL IP/MAC Filter Rule Editing IP/MAC Filter Set Index Active Interface Direction Rule Type Select the index number of the filter rule. Use this field to enable or disable the rule. Select the PVC to which to apply the filter. Apply the filter to Both, Incoming or Outgoing traffic direction. Select IP or MAC type to configure the rule. Use the IP Filter to block traffic by IP addresses. Use the MAC Filter to block traffic by MAC address. Enter the source IP address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is ignored if it is 0.0.0.0. Enter the IP subnet mask for the source IP address Enter the source port of the packets that you wish to filter. The range of this field is 0 to 65535. This field is ignored if it is 0. Enter the destination IP address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is ignored if it is 0.0.0.0. Source IP Address Subnet Mask Port Number Destination IP Address 156 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 11 Filters Table 58 Access Management > Filter (IP/MAC) (continued) LABEL Subnet Mask Port Number DESCRIPTION Enter the IP subnet mask for the destination IP address. Enter the destination port of the packets that you wish to filter. The range of this field is 0 to 65535. This field is ignored if it is 0. Select ICMP, TCP or UDP for the upper layer protocol. This field is only available when you select MAC in the Rule Type field. Protocol MAC Address IP/MAC Filter Listing IP/MAC Filter Set Index Interface Direction

Active Src IP/Mask Dest IP/Mask Mac Address Src Port Dest Port Protocol Save Delete Cancel Enter the MAC address of the packets you wish to filter. Select the index number of the filter set from the drop-down list box. This is the interface that the filter set applies to. The filter set applies to this traffic direction. This is the index number of the rule in a filter set. This field shows whether the rule is activated. This is the source IP address and subnet mask when you select IP as the rule type. This is the destination IP address and subnet mask. This is the MAC address when you select MAC as the rule type. This is the source port number. This is the destination port number. This is the upper layer protocol. Click this to save your changes. Click this to remove the filter rule. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 157 Chapter 11 Filters 158 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 12 Static Route 12.1 Overview The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the Devices LAN interface. The Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Devices default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 88 Example of Static Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 159 Chapter 12 Static Route 12.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens Use the Static Route screens (Section 12.2 on page 160) to view and configure IP static routes on the Device. 12.2 The Static Route Screen Use this screen to view the static route rules. Click Advanced > Static Route to open the Static Route screen. Figure 89 Advanced > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Advanced > Static Route LABEL

Destination DESCRIPTION This is the number of an individual static route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the Device. Netmask Gateway Modify Click the Remove icon to remove a static route from the Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. 160 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 12.2.1 Static Route Edit Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route. Select a static route index number and click Edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 90 Advanced > Static Route: Edit Chapter 12 Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Advanced > Static Route: Edit LABEL Static Route Setup Destination IP Address DESCRIPTION This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Back Apply Cancel AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 161 Chapter 12 Static Route 162 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 13 Port Binding 13.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure the port binding settings. Port binding allows you to aggregate port connections into logical groups. You may bind WAN PVCs to Ethernet ports and WLANs to specify how traffic is forwarded. Different ATM QoS settings can be specified for each WAN PVC to meet bandwidth requirements for the type of traffic to be transferred. For example, three port binding groups could be created on the device (R1) for three different WAN PVC connections. The first PVC (PVC0) is for non time-sensitive data traffic. The second and third PVCs (PVC1 and PVC2) are for time sensitive Media-On-Demand (MOD) video traffic and VoIP traffic, respectively. Figure 91 Port Binding Groups Data VoIP MOD PVC0 R1 PVC1 PVC2 R1 R1 S1 S2 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 163 Chapter 13 Port Binding If a WAN PVC is bound to an ethernet port, traffic from the ethernet port will only be forwarded through the specified WAN PVC and vice versa. If a port is not in a port binding group, traffic to and from the port will be forwarded according to the routing table. 13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens Use the Port Binding screen (Section 13.2 on page 164) to activate port binding and set up port binding groups. Use the Port Binding Summary screen (Section 13.2.1 on page 165) to view configured port binding groups. 13.2 The Port Binding Screen Use this screen to activate port binding and set up port binding groups. Click Advanced > Port Binding to display the following screen. Figure 92 Advanced > Port Binding The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 61 Advanced > Port Binding LABEL Port Binding Active Group Index DESCRIPTION Activate or deactivate the port binding feature. Select the index number for the port binding group. ATM VCs Ethernet WLAN 164 When a port is assigned to a port binding group, traffic will be forwarded to the other ports in the group, but not to ports in other groups. If a port is not included in any groups, traffic will be forwarded according to the routing table. Select the ATM VC (PVC) to include in the port binding group. Each ATM VC can only be binded to one group. Select the Ethernet (Eth) ports to include in the port binding group. Each Ethernet port can only be binded to one group. Select the WLAN (AP) connections to include in the port binding group. Additional APs can be enabled on the More AP screen (Section 8.3 on page 106). AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 13 Port Binding DESCRIPTION Table 61 Advanced > Port Binding (continued) LABEL Group Summary Port Binding Summary Apply Delete Cancel Add the selected port binding group configuration. Delete the selected port binding group configuration. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to view a summary of configured port binding groups. 13.2.1 Port Binding Summary screen Use this screen to view configured port binding groups. In the Port Binding screen, click the PortBinding Summary button in the Group Summary section to display the following screen. Figure 93 Advanced > Port Binding > PortBinding Summary The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 62 Advanced > Port Binding > PortBinding Summary LABEL Group ID Group port DESCRIPTION This field displays the group index number. This field displays the ports included in the group. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 165 Chapter 13 Port Binding 166 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 14 PVID Setting 14.1 Overview This chapter describes how to assign ports into Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN) and configure frame tagging settings. A VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. A VLAN group can be treated as an individual device. Each group can have its own rules about where and how to forward traffic. You can assign any ports on the Device to a VLAN group and configure the settings for the group. Figure 94 802.1Q Ports 802.1Q VLAN Groups 14.1.1 What You Can Do in the pvid Setting Screen Use the pvid Setting screen (Section 14.2 on page 168) to configure the PVID and tagging settings. 14.1.2 What You Need to Know About 802.1Q IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the device on which they were created. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the device is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-aware device to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware device, the Device first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-

unaware device to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the Device first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default VID. The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports, but this can be changed. Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on a per-VLAN, per-

port basis (recall that a port can belong to multiple VLANs). If the tagging on the egress port is AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 167 Chapter 14 PVID Setting enabled for the VID of a frame, then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame; otherwise, it is transmitted as an untagged frame. 14.2 The pvid Setting Screen Use this screen to activate VLAN and set up VLANs. Click Advanced > pvid Setting to display the following screen. Figure 95 Advanced > pvid Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 63 Advanced > pvid Setting LABEL Active PORT PVID DESCRIPTION Activate or deactivate the VLAN feature. This field displays the types of ports available to join the VLAN group. Assign a VLAN ID for the port. The valid VID range is between 1 and 4094. The Device assigns the PVID to untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port. Select TAG if you want the port to tag all outgoing traffic trasmitted through this VLAN. You select this if you want to create VLANs across different devices and just the Device. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. TAG Apply Cancel 168 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 15 Quality of Service (QoS) 15.1 Overview Use the QoS screen to set up your Device to use QoS for traffic management. Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control bandwidth. QoS allows the Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Without QoS, all traffic data are equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical applications such as video-on-demand. The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned with a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priorities if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 50 Mbps. You configure a classifier to assign the highest priority queue (6) to VoIP traffic from the LAN interface, so that voice traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Traffic from the bosss IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) is mapped to queue 5. Traffic that does not match these two classes are assigned priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the Device. Figure 96 QoS Example VoIP: Queue 6 Boss: Queue 5 IP=192.168.1.23 DSL 50 Mbps 15.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens Use the QoS screen (Section 15.2 on page 170) to configure QoS settings on the Device. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 169 Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS) Use the QoS Settings Summary screen (Section 15.2.1 on page 173) to check the summary of QoS rules and actions you configured for the Device. 15.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS 802.1p QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. 802.1p is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use 802.1p to give different priorities to different packet types. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. Finding Out More See Section 15.3 on page 174 for advanced technical information on QoS. 15.2 The QoS Screen Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and have the Device assign priority levels to traffic according to the port range, IEEE 802.1p priority level and/or IP precedence. 170 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Click Advanced Setup > QoS to open the screen as shown next. Figure 97 Advanced Setup > QoS Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 64 Advanced Setup > QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION Quality of Service QoS Use this field to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. Discipline You can give priority to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Select weighted round-robin (WRR) scheduling to allow packets of all priorities to transmit depending on their assigned relative weight. Select Strict Priority to require traffic transmit in order of priority. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 171 Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 64 Advanced Setup > QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION If you selected WRR, specify the WRR weight for each queue index. A higher weight WRR Weight indicates the traffic will receive more bandwidth while a lower weight indicates it will receive less bandwidth. For example, 15 is receives more bandwidth than 1. Click this to save the discipline. Click this to open a summary table showing the QoS settings. See Section 15.2.1 on page 173 for more details. Discipline Save Rule&Action Summary Rule Rule Index Active Application Physical Ports Destination MAC IP Mask Port Range Source MAC IP Mask Port Range Protocol ID Vlan ID Range IPP/DS Field IP Precedence Range Type of Service DSCP Range 802.1p Action IPP/DS Field IP Precedence Remarking Select the rules index number from the drop-down list box. Use this field to enable or disable the rule. Select an application from the drop-down list box. The Destination Port Range and Protocol ID fields may change depending on the type of applications you choose. Select the port to apply the rule to. Type a destination MAC address here. QoS is then applied to traffic containing this destination MAC address. Leave it blank to apply the rule to all MAC addresses. Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation. QoS is then applied to traffic containing this destination IP address. A blank destination IP address means any destination IP address. Enter a destination subnet mask here. Either use the default value set by the application you choose, or enter the port number to which the rule should be applied. Type a source MAC address here. QoS is then applied to traffic containing this source MAC address. Leave it blank to apply the rule to all MAC addresses. Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation. QoS is then applied to traffic containing this source IP address. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Enter a source subnet mask here. Enter the port number to which the rule should be applied. 0 means any source port number. See Appendix F on page 291 for some common services and port numbers. Select an IP protocol type from the drop-down list box. Enter the source VLAN ID in this field. Select IPP/TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services. Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) range. Enter a range from 0 to 7 for IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority and seven is the highest. Select a type of service from the drop-down list box. Available options are: Normal service, Minimize delay, Maximize throughput, Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost. Specify a DSCP number between 0 and 63 in this field. Select a priority level (0 to 7) from the drop-down list box. Select IPP/TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services. Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) range. Enter a range from 0 to 7 to re-assign IP precedence to matched traffic. Zero is the lowest priority and seven is the highest. 172 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 64 Advanced Setup > QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a type of service to re-assign the priority level to matched traffic. Type of Service Remarking Available options are: Normal service, Minimize delay, Maximize throughput, Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost. Specify a DSCP number between 0 and 63 to re-assign the priority level to matched traffic. DSCP Remarking 802.1p Remarking Select a priority level (0 to 7) to re-assign the priority level to matched traffic. Queue #

Specify a Low, Medium, High or Highest queue tag to matched traffic. Traffic assigned to a higher queue gets through faster while traffic in lower queues is dropped when there is network congestion. Click this to add the rule. Click this to remove the rule. Click this to restore previously saved settings. ADD DELETE CANCEL 15.2.1 The QoS Settings Summary Screen Use this screen to display a summary of rules and actions configured for the Device. In the Advanced > QoS screen, click the Rule&Action Summary button to open the following screen. Figure 98 Advanced Setup > QoS > QoS Settings Summary DESCRIPTION The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 65 Advanced Setup > QoS > Rule&Action Summary LABEL Rules

Active Physical Ports Destination MAC and IP/Mask Port Ranges Source MAC and IP/

Mask Port Ranges Protocol ID VLAN ID This is the protocol ID associated with the rule. This is the VLAN ID associated with the rule. This is the rules index number. This shows whether the rule is enabled or disabled. This is the physical port associated with the rule. This is the port range for destination MAC address and IP address. This is the port range for source MAC address and IP address. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 173 Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 65 Advanced Setup > QoS > Rule&Action Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION This shows the IPP/TOS or DSCP settings. This is the 802.1p priority level. IPP/TOS (DSCP) 802.1p Actions IPP/TOS (DSCP) Remarking 802.1p Remarking Queue #

The Device re-assigns the priority values specified in this field to matched traffic. The Device re-assigns the priority levels specified in this field to matched traffic. The Device assigns the queue level specified in this field to matched traffic. 15.3 QoS Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 15.3.1 IEEE 802.1p IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 66 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 7 Level 6 TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. This is for spare bandwidth. This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Typically used for best-effort traffic. Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 0 15.3.2 IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. 174 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS) 15.3.3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the Device, the Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the Device. On the Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. Table 67 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping PRIORITY QUEUE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 2 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY

(ETHERNET PRIORITY) 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 3 TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)

>1100 250~1100

<250 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 000000 000000 001110 001100 001010 001000 010110 010100 010010 010000 011110 011100 011010 011000 100110 100100 100010 100000 101110 101000 110000 111000 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 175 Chapter 15 Quality of Service (QoS) 176 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 16 Dynamic DNS Setup 16.1 Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 16.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 16.2 on page 178) to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the Device. 16.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 177 Chapter 16 Dynamic DNS Setup 16.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use this screen to change your Devices DDNS. Click Advanced > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 99 Advanced > Dynamic DNS DESCRIPTION The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 68 Advanced > Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS Setup Active Dynamic DNS Service Provider Dynamic DNS Type Host Name Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider. Type the domain name assigned to your Device by your Dynamic DNS provider. User Name Password Enable Wildcard Option Apply Cancel You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 178 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 17 Remote Management 17.1 Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which Device interface (if any) from which computers. The following figure shows remote management of the Device coming in from the WAN. Figure 100 Remote Management From the WAN LAN WAN HTTP Telnet Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you still need to configure an IP filter rule to allow access. You may manage your Device from a remote location via:

Internet (WAN only) LAN only LAN and WAN None (Disable) To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Service Access field. You may only have one remote management session running at a time. The Device automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts. The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows. 1 Telnet 2 HTTP AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 179 Chapter 17 Remote Management 17.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens Use the WWW screen (Section 17.2 on page 181) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the Device. Use the Telnet screen (Section 17.3 on page 181) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the Device. Use the FTP screen (Section 17.4 on page 182) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the Device. Your Device can act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Device through the network. Use the SNMP screen (see Section 17.5 on page 183) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use SNMP to access the Device. Use the DNS screen (Section 17.6 on page 185) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the Device. Use the ICMP screen (Section 17.7 on page 185) to set whether or not your Device will respond to pings and probes for services that you have not made available. 17.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management Remote Management Limitations Remote management does not work when:

You have not enabled that service on the interface in the corresponding remote management screen. You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens. The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the Device will disconnect the session immediately. There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:

Use the Devices WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Use the Devices LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The Device automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. 180 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management 17.2 The WWW Screen Use this screen to specify how to connect to the Device from a web browser, such as Internet Explorer. 17.2.1 Configuring the WWW Screen Click Advanced > Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen. Figure 101 Advanced > Remote MGMT > WWW The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 69 Advanced > Remote Management > WWW LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service, if needed. However, you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the Device using this service. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Device using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the Device using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the Device using this service. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Server Access Secured Client IP Address Apply Reset 17.3 The Telnet Screen You can use Telnet to access the Devices command line interface. Specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 181 Chapter 17 Remote Management Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > Telnet tab to display the screen as shown. Figure 102 Advanced > Remote MGMT > Telnet The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 70 Advanced > Remote Management > Telnet LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the Device using this service. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Device using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the Device using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the Device using this service. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Server Access Secured Client IP Address Apply Reset 17.4 The FTP Screen You can use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) to upload and download the Devices firmware and configuration files. Please see the Users Guide chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP address the access can come. To change your Devices FTP settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT > FTP. The screen appears as shown. Figure 103 Advanced > Remote MGMT > FTP 182 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 71 Advanced > Remote MGMT > FTP LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION You may change the server port number for a service, if needed. However, you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the Device using this service. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Device using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the Device using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the Device using this service. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Server Access Secured Client IP Address Apply Reset 17.5 The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. Your Device supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Device through the network. The Device supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. Figure 104 SNMP Management Model An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager. An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the Device). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 183 Chapter 17 Remote Management network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices. The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects. 17.5.1 Configuring SNMP To change your Devices SNMP settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT > SNMP tab. The screen appears as shown. Figure 105 Advanced > Remote MGMT > SNMP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 72 Advanced > Remote MGMT > SNMP LABEL SNMP Server Port DESCRIPTION The SNMP agent listens on port 161 by default. If you change the SNMP server port to a different number on the Device, for example 8161, then you must notify people who need to access the Device SNMP agent to use the same port. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the Device using this service. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to access the SNMP agent on the Device. Select All to allow any computer to access the SNMP agent. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the SNMP agent. Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Server Access Secured Client IP Address SNMP Configuration Get Community Set Community Apply Reset 184 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management 17.6 The DNS Screen Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. Refer to Chapter 7 on page 85 for background information. Use this screen to set from which IP address the Device will accept DNS queries and on which interface it can send them your Devices DNS settings. This feature is not available when the Device is set to bridge mode. Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > DNS to change your Devices DNS settings. Figure 106 Advanced > Remote Management > DNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 73 Advanced > Remote Management > DNS LABEL Server Port Server Access Secured Client IP Address DESCRIPTION The DNS service port number is 53 and can be changed here. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may send DNS queries to the Device. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the Device. Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the Device. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to send DNS queries to the Device. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Reset 17.7 The ICMP Screen To change your Devices security settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT > ICMP. The screen appears as shown. If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your Device, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the Device exists. Your Device supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your Device when unsupported ports are probed. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 185 Chapter 17 Remote Management Note: If you want your device to respond to pings and requests for unauthorized services, you may also need to configure the firewall anti probing settings to match. Figure 107 Advanced > Remote Management > ICMP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Advanced > Remote Management > ICMP LABEL ICMP DESCRIPTION Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. Respond to Ping on The Device will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Reset 186 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 18.1 Overview Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. 18.1.1 What You Can Do in the UPnP Screen Use the UPnP screen (Section 18.2 on page 188) to enable UPnP on the Device and allow UPnP-

enabled applications to automatically configure the Device. 18.1.2 What You Need to Know About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 187 Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP. 18.2 The UPnP Screen Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device. Click Advanced > UPnP to display the screen shown next. See Section 18.1 on page 187 for more information. Figure 108 Advanced > UPnP > General The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 75 Advanced > UPnP > General LABEL Active the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Feature Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the Device so that they can communicate through the Device, for example by using NAT traversal, UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application. 188 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Table 75 Advanced > UPnP > General LABEL Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 18.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP. Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. 1 2 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details. Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 189 Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box. Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components 4 5 Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next. Restart the computer when prompted. Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 190 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 3 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components . Network Connections Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 191 Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Networking Services 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next. 18.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Device. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device. Turn on your computer and the Device. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. 192 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. Network Connections Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Internet Connection Properties AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 193 Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 194 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. System Tray Icon Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Internet Connection Status Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the Device without finding out the IP address of the Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Device. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 195 Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. 196 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 5 Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Network Connections: My Network Places Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 6 Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the Device. Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 197 Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 198 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 19 CWMP 19.1 Overview The Device supports TR-069 Amendment 1 (CPE WAN Management Protocol Release 2.0) and TR-

069 Amendment 2 (CPE WAN Management Protocol v1.1, Release 3.0). TR-069 is a protocol that defines how your Device (ZD) can be managed via a management server

(MS) such as ZyXELs Vantage Access. Figure 109 LAN and WAN ZD MS An administrator can use a management server to remotely set up the Device, modify settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the Device. In order to use CWMP, you need to configure the following steps:

1 2 3 Activate CWMP Specify the URL, username and password. Activate periodic inform and specify an interval value. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 199 Chapter 19 CWMP 19.2 The CWMP Setup Screen Use this screen to configure your Device to be managed by a management server. Click Advanced> CWMP to display the following screen. Figure 110 Advanced > CWMP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 76 Advanced > CWMP LINK CWMP Setup DESCRIPTION CWMP ACS Login Information URL User Name Select Activated to allow the Device to be managed by a management server or select Deactivated to not allow the Device to be managed by a management server. Configure this part of the screen to log into the management server. Type the IP address or domain name of the management server. If the Device is behind a NAT router that assigns it a private IP address, you will have to configure a NAT port forwarding rule on the NAT router. The user name is used to authenticate the Device when making a connection to the management server. This user name on the management server and the Device must be the same. Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language keyboard. Spaces and characters such as @#$%^&*()_+ are allowed. 200 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 19 CWMP Table 76 Advanced > CWMP (continued) LINK Password Connection Request Information Path Port UserName Password Periodic Inform Config Periodic Inform Interval Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION The password is used to authenticate the Device when making a connection to the management server. This password on the management server and the Device must be the same. Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language keyboard. Use this part of the screen to allow the management server to connect to the Device after a successful login. Type the IP address or domain name of the Device. The management server uses this path to verify the Device. The default port for access to the Device from the management server is port 7547. If you change it, make sure it does not conflict with another port on your network and it is recommended to use a port number above 1024 (not a commonly used port). The management server should use this port to connect to the Device. You may need to alter your NAT port forwarding rules if they were already configured. The user name is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the Device. Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language keyboard. Spaces and characters such as @#$%^&*()_+ are allowed. The password is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the Device. Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language keyboard. Spaces are not allowed. Select Activated to have the Device periodically send information to the management server (recommended if CWMP is enabled) or select Deactivated to not have the Device periodically send information to the management server The interval is the duration in seconds for which the Device must attempt to connect with the management server to send information and check for configuration updates. Enter a value between 1 and 86400 seconds. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 201 Chapter 19 CWMP 202 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 20 System Settings 20.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval. 20.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens Use the General screen (Section 20.2 on page 203) to configure system settings. Use the Time and Date screen (Section 20.3 on page 204) to set the system time. 20.2 The General Screen Use this screen to configure system admin password. Click Maintenance > System to open the General screen. Figure 111 Maintenance > System > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Maintenance > System > General LABEL Password Admin Password Old Password DESCRIPTION Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the Device. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 203 Chapter 20 System Settings Table 77 Maintenance > System > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Type the new password again for confirmation. Retype to confirm Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 20.3 The Time and Date Screen Use this screen to configure the Devices time based on your local time zone. To change your Devices time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time and Date. The screen appears as shown. Figure 112 Maintenance > System > Time and Date The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 78 Maintenance > System > Time and Date LABEL Current Time and Date Current Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the time of your Device. Current Date Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the time with the time server. This field displays the date of your Device. Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the date with the time server. Time and Date Setup 204 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 20 System Settings Table 78 Maintenance > System > Time and Date (continued) LABEL Manual DESCRIPTION Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it. This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Select this radio button to have the Device get the time and date from the time server you specified below. Enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. New Time

(hh:mm:ss) New Date

(yyyy/mm/dd) Get from Time Server Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone Daylight Savings Start Date End Date Apply Cancel AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 205 Chapter 20 System Settings 206 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 21 Logs 21.1 Overview This chapter contains information about viewing the Devices logs. The web configurator allows you to choose which types of events and/or alerts to have the Device log and then display the logs. 21.1.1 What You Need To Know About Logs Alerts An alert is a message that is enabled as soon as the event occurs. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. Logs A log is a message about an event that occurred on your Device. For example, when someone logs in to the Device, you can set a schedule for how often logs should be enabled, or sent to a syslog server. 21.2 The System Log Screen Use the System Log screen to configure and view the logs you wish to display. To change your Devices log settings, click Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings. The screen appears as shown. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 207 Chapter 21 Logs Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs may be e-mailed as soon as the log is full. Selecting many alert and/or log categories (especially Access Control) may result in many e-mails being sent. Figure 113 Maintenance > System Logs The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 79 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings LABEL System Log Log Type DESCRIPTION Select the types of logs that you want to display and record. Then click Submit to display the details. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to save the logs in a text file. Clear Log Save Log Remote System Log Active Remote Host Save Select to enable or disable remote system logging. Specify the address of the remote host to send logs to. Click this to save your changes. 208 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 21.3 Log Descriptions Chapter 21 Logs This section provides descriptions of example log messages. Table 80 System Maintenance Logs LOG MESSAGE Time calibration is successful Time calibration failed WAN interface gets IP: %s DHCP client IP expired DHCP server assigns %s Successful WEB login WEB login failed Successful TELNET login TELNET login failed Successful FTP login FTP login failed NAT Session Table is Full!

DESCRIPTION The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server. The router failed to get information from the time server. A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP, PPPoE, or dial-up server. A DHCP client's IP address has expired. The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client. Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface. Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface. Someone has logged on to the router via telnet. Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet. Someone has logged on to the router via ftp. Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp. The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full. Starting Connectivity Monitor. The router got the time and date from the Daytime server. Starting Connectivity Monitor Time initialized by Daytime Server Time initialized by Time server The router got the time and date from the time server. Time initialized by NTP server The router got the time and date from the NTP server. Connect to Daytime server fail The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server. Connect to Time server fail The router was not able to connect to the Time server. Connect to NTP server fail The router was not able to connect to the NTP server. Too large ICMP packet has been The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large. dropped Configuration Change: PC =

0x%x, Task ID = 0x%x Successful SSH login SSH login failed Successful HTTPS login The router is saving configuration changes. Someone has logged on to the routers SSH server. Someone has failed to log on to the routers SSH server. Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol. Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol. HTTPS login failed AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 209 Chapter 21 Logs Table 81 System Error Logs LOG MESSAGE

%s exceeds the max. number of session per host!

setNetBIOSFilter: calloc error readNetBIOSFilter: calloc error WAN connection is down. DESCRIPTION This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host. The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings. The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings. A WAN connection is down. You can access the network through this interface. Table 82 Access Control Logs LOG MESSAGE Firewall default policy: [ TCP |

UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

<Packet Direction>

Firewall rule [] match:[ TCP | UDP

| IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF ] <Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>

Triangle route packet forwarded: [

TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF

Packet without a NAT table entry blocked: [ TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP |

GRE | OSPF ]

Router sent blocked web site message: TCP DESCRIPTION Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the default policys setting. Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched

(or did not match) a configured firewall rule (deed by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through. The router blocked a packet that didn't have a corresponding NAT table entry. The router sent a message to notify a user that the router blocked access to a web site that the user requested. Table 83 TCP Reset Logs LOG MESSAGE Under SYN flood attack, sent TCP RST Exceed TCP MAX incomplete, sent TCP RST Peer TCP state out of order, sent TCP RST Firewall session time out, sent TCP RST DESCRIPTION The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN flood attack (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of TCP incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold. (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) e: Refer to TCP Maximum Incomplete in the Firewall Attack Alerts screen. The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state was out of order.e: The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to check the TCP state. The router sent a TCP reset packet when a dynamic firewall session timed out.Default timeout values:ICMP idle timeout (s): 60UDP idle timeout (s): 60TCP connection (three way handshaking) timeout (s):

30TCP FIN-wait timeout (s): 60TCP idle (established) timeout (s):

3600 210 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 21 Logs Table 83 TCP Reset Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE Exceed MAX incomplete, sent TCP RST Access block, sent TCP RST DESCRIPTION The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of incomplete connections (TCP and UDP) exceeded the user-configured threshold.

(Incomplete count is for all TCP and UDP connections through the firewall.)e: When the number of incomplete connections (TCP + UDP)

> Maximum Incomplete High, the router sends TCP RST packets for TCP connections and destroys TOS (firewall dynamic sessions) until incomplete connections < Maximum Incomplete Low. The router sends a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you turn on the firewall TCP reset mechanism (via CI command: "sys firewall tcprst"). Table 84 Packet Filter Logs LOG MESSAGE

[ TCP | UDP | ICMP | IGMP |

Generic ] packet filter matched

(set: %d, rule: %d) DESCRIPTION Attempted access matched a configured filter rule (deed by its set and rule number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. For type and code details, see Table 93 on page 214. Table 85 ICMP Logs LOG MESSAGE Firewall default policy: ICMP

<Packet Direction>, <type:%d>,

<code:%d>

Firewall rule [] match: ICMP

<Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>,

<type:%d>, <code:%d>

Triangle route packet forwarded:

ICMP Packet without a NAT table entry blocked: ICMP Unsupported/out-of-order ICMP:

ICMP Router reply ICMP packet: ICMP DESCRIPTION ICMP access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the user's setting. ICMP access matched (or didnt match) a firewall rule (deed by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through. The router blocked a packet that didnt have a corresponding NAT table entry. The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets or the ICMP packets are out of order. The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender. Table 86 CDR Logs LOG MESSAGE board %d line %d channel %d, call %d, %s C01 Outgoing Call dev=%x ch=%x %s DESCRIPTION The router received the setup requirements for a call. call is the reference (count) number of the call. dev is the device type (3 is for dial-up, 6 is for PPPoE, 10 is for PPTP) "channel" or ch is the call channel ID. For example,"board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 3, C01 Outgoing Call dev=6 ch=0 "Means the router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 211 Chapter 21 Logs Table 86 CDR Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE board %d line %d channel %d, call %d, %s C02 OutCall Connected %d %s board %d line %d channel %d, call %d, %s C02 Call Terminated DESCRIPTION The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call is connected. The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call was disconnected. Table 87 PPP Logs LOG MESSAGE ppp:LCP Starting ppp:LCP Opening ppp:CHAP Opening ppp:IPCP Starting ppp:IPCP Opening ppp:LCP Closing ppp:IPCP Closing DESCRIPTION The PPP connections Link Control Protocol stage has started. The PPP connections Link Control Protocol stage is opening. The PPP connections Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is opening. The PPP connections Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting. The PPP connections Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening. The PPP connections Link Control Protocol stage is closing. The PPP connections Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing. Table 88 UPnP Logs LOG MESSAGE UPnP pass through Firewall DESCRIPTION UPnP packets can pass through the firewall. Table 89 Content Filtering Logs LOG MESSAGE

%s: block keyword

%s DESCRIPTION The content of a requested web page matched a user defined keyword. The system forwarded web content. For type and code details, see Table 93 on page 214. Table 90 Attack Logs LOG MESSAGE attack [ TCP | UDP | IGMP |

ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

attack ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) land [ TCP | UDP | IGMP |

ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

land ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) ip spoofing - WAN [ TCP |

UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE |

OSPF ]

DESCRIPTION The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF attack. The firewall detected an ICMP attack. The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF land attack. The firewall detected an ICMP land attack. The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port. 212 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 21 Logs Table 90 Attack Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE ip spoofing - WAN ICMP

(type:%d, code:%d) icmp echo : ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) syn flood TCP ports scan TCP teardrop TCP teardrop UDP teardrop ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) illegal command TCP NetBIOS TCP ip spoofing - no routing entry [ TCP | UDP | IGMP |

ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

ip spoofing - no routing entry ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) vulnerability ICMP

(type:%d, code:%d) traceroute ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) DESCRIPTION The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the WAN port. The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack. The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack. The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack. The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack. The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack. The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack. The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack. The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack. The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack. The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack. The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack. The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack. Table 91 802.1X Logs LOG MESSAGE RADIUS accepts user. RADIUS rejects user. Pls check RADIUS Server. User logout because of session timeout expired. User logout because of user deassociation. User logout because of no authentication response from user. User logout because of idle timeout expired. User logout because of user request. No response from RADIUS. Pls check RADIUS Server. Use RADIUS to authenticate user. No Server to authenticate user. DESCRIPTION A user was authenticated by the RADIUS Server. A user was not authenticated by the RADIUS Server. Please check the RADIUS Server. The router logged out a user whose session expired. The router logged out a user who ended the session. The router logged out a user from which there was no authentication response. The router logged out a user whose idle timeout period expired. A user logged out. There is no response message from the RADIUS server, please check the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server is operating as the authentication server. There is no authentication server to authenticate a user. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 213 Chapter 21 Logs Table 92 ACL Setting Notes PACKET DIRECTION DIRECTION

(L to W) LAN to WAN WAN to LAN

(W to L) LAN to LAN/

(L to L/Device) Device WAN to WAN/

Device

(W to W/Device) DESCRIPTION ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the WAN. ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the LAN. ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the LAN or the Device. ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the WAN or the Device. Table 93 ICMP Notes TYPE 0 CODE 3 4 5 8 11 12 13 14 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 1 2 3 0 0 1 0 0 0 DESCRIPTION Echo Reply Echo reply message Destination Unreachable Net unreachable Host unreachable Protocol unreachable Port unreachable A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don't Fragment (DF) Source route failed Source Quench A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network. Redirect Redirect datagrams for the Network Redirect datagrams for the Host Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host Echo Echo message Time Exceeded Time to live exceeded in transit Fragment reassembly time exceeded Parameter Problem Pointer indicates the error Timestamp Timestamp request message Timestamp Reply Timestamp reply message 214 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 21 Logs CODE Table 93 ICMP Notes (continued) TYPE DESCRIPTION 15 Information Request Information request message Information Reply Information reply message 16 0 0 Table 94 Syslog Logs LOG MESSAGE

<Facility*8 + Severity>Mon dd hr:mm:ss hostname src="<srcIP:srcPort>"

dst="<dstIP:dstPort>"

msg="<msg>" e="<e>"

devID="<mac address last three numbers>" cat="<category>

DESCRIPTION

"This message is sent by the system ("RAS" displays as the system name if you havent configured one) when the router generates a syslog. The facility is defined in the web MAIN MENU->LOGS->Log Settings page. The severity is the logs syslog class. The definition of messages and notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this appendix. The devID is the last three characters of the MAC address of the routers LAN port. The cat is the same as the category in the routers logs. The following table shows RFC-2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays. Please refer to RFC 2408 for detailed information on each type. Table 95 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types LOG DISPLAY SA PROP TRANS KE ID CER CER_REQ HASH SIG NONCE FY DEL VID PAYLOAD TYPE Security Association Proposal Transform Key Exchange Identification Certificate Certificate Request Hash Signature Nonce notification Delete Vendor ID AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 215 Chapter 21 Logs 216 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 22 Tools 22.1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware, manage configuration files and restart your Device. Use the instructions in this chapter to change the devices configuration file or upgrade its firmware. After you configure your device, you can backup the configuration file to a computer. That way if you later misconfigure the device, you can upload the backed up configuration file to return to your previous settings. You can alternately upload the factory default configuration file if you want to return the device to the original default settings. The firmware determines the devices available features and functionality. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your devices performance. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device. 22.1.1 What You Can Do in the Tool Screens Use the Firmware Upgrade screen (Section 22.2 on page 217) to upload firmware to your device. Use the Configuration screen (Section 22.3 on page 219) to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. Use the Restart screen (Section 22.4 on page 221) to restart your Device. 22.2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance > Tools to open the Firmware screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your Device. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 217 Chapter 22 Tools Do not turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 114 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 96 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware LABEL Current Firmware Version File Path DESCRIPTION This is the present Firmware version and the date created. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Browse... Upload After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Device again. Figure 115 Firmware Upload In Progress 218 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 116 Network Temporarily Disconnected Chapter 22 Tools After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen. Figure 117 Error Message 22.3 The Configuration Screen Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next. Figure 118 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 219 Chapter 22 Tools Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the Devices current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the Devices current configuration to your computer. Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your Device. Table 97 Restore Configuration LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Click this to begin the upload process. Browse... Upload Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress. After you see a restore configuration successful screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the Device again. Figure 119 Configuration Upload Successful The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 120 Network Temporarily Disconnected 220 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 22 Tools If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix A on page 231 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen. Figure 121 Configuration Upload Error Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. Figure 122 Reset Warning Message Figure 123 Reset In Process Message You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device. Refer to Section 1.7 on page 19 for more information on the RESET button. 22.4 The Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the Device hangs, for example. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 221 Chapter 22 Tools Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the Device reboot. This does not affect the Device's configuration. Figure 124 Maintenance > Tools >Restart 222 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Diagnostic 23.1 Overview These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device. 23.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens Use the General screen (Section 23.2 on page 223) to ping an IP address. Use the DSL Line screen (Section 23.3 on page 224) to view the DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line. 23.2 The General Screen Use this screen to ping an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic to open the screen shown next. Figure 125 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 223 Chapter 23 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 98 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General LABEL TCP/IP Address Ping DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection. Click this to ping the IP address that you entered. 23.3 The DSL Line Screen Use this screen to view the DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line. Click Maintenance >

Diagnostic > DSL Line to open the screen shown next. Figure 126 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line 224 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 23 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 99 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line LABEL ATM Status DESCRIPTION Click this to view your DSL connections Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) statistics. ATM is a networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS

(Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. The (Segmentation and Reassembly) SAR driver translates packets into ATM cells. It also receives ATM cells and reassembles them into packets. These counters are set back to zero whenever the device starts up. inPkts is the number of good ATM cells that have been received. inDiscards is the number of received ATM cells that were rejected. outPkts is the number of ATM cells that have been sent. outDiscards is the number of ATM cells sent that were rejected. inF4Pkts is the number of ATM Operations, Administration, and Management

(OAM) F4 cells that have been received. See ITU recommendation I.610 for more on OAM for ATM. outF4Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F4 cells that have been sent. inF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been received. outF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been sent. openChan is the number of times that the Device has opened a logical DSL channel. closeChan is the number of times that the Device has closed a logical DSL channel. txRate is the number of bytes transmitted per second. rxRate is the number of bytes received per second. Click this to start the ATM loopback test. Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs/VCIs before you begin this test. The Device sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM/ATM switch and then returns it (loops it back) to the Device. The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network. ATM Loopback Test AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 225 Chapter 23 Diagnostic Table 99 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line (continued) LABEL DSL Line Status Click this to view statistics about the DSL connections. DESCRIPTION noise margin downstream is the signal to noise ratio for the downstream part of the connection (coming into the Device from the ISP). It is measured in decibels. The higher the number the more signal and less noise there is. output power upstream is the amount of power (in decibels) that the Device is using to transmit to the ISP. attenuation downstream is the reduction in amplitude (in decibels) of the DSL signal coming into the Device from the ISP. Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT) modulation divides up a lines bandwidth into sub-

carriers (sub-channels) of 4.3125 KHz each called tones. The rest of the display is the lines bit allocation. This is displayed as the number (in hexadecimal format) of bits transmitted for each tone. This can be used to determine the quality of the connection, whether a given sub-carrier loop has sufficient margins to support certain ADSL transmission rates, and possibly to determine whether particular specific types of interference or line attenuation exist. Refer to the ITU-T G.992.1 recommendation for more information on DMT. The better (or shorter) the line, the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone. The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15. There will be some tones without any bits as there has to be space between the upstream and downstream channels. Reset ADSL Line Click this to reinitialize the ADSL line. The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation, for example:

"Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F/W... Reset ADSL Line Successfully!"

Capture All Logs Click this to display information and statistics about your Devices ATM statistics, DSL connection statistics, DHCP settings, firmware version, WAN and gateway IP address, VPI/VCI and LAN IP address. 226 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide CHAPTER 24 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs Device Access and Login Internet Access 24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure the Device is turned on. 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device. 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 4 5 Turn the Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.6 on page 18. 2 3 4 5 Check the hardware connections. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Turn the Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 227 Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 24.2 Device Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the Device. 1 2 3 The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page 19. I forgot the password. 1 2 The default admin password is 1234. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page 19. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section 7.2 on page 86), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Device. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix C on page 259. 4 5 228 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Device with the default IP address. See Section 1.7 on page 19. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting Try to access the Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not respond to HTTP. If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a ETHERNET port. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Device. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default admin password is 1234. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 4 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device. Log out of the Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Turn the Device off and on. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 24.1 on page 227. I cannot Telnet to the Device. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. 24.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 18. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are case-

sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 229 Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 3 4 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure you enabled the wireless LAN and have selected the correct channel in the Wireless LAN > AP screen. 5 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 6 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the Device), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 2 3 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 18. Turn the Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 1 2 3 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.6 on page 18. If the Device is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving your computer closer to the Device if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). Turn the Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications. 230 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide APPENDIX A Setting up Your Computers IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed. Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package. TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems. After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to

"communicate" with your network. If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Devices LAN port. Windows 95/98/Me Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window. Figure 127 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 231 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks. If you need the adapter:

In the Network window, click Add. Select Adapter and then click Add. Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK. If you need TCP/IP:

In the Network window, click Add. Select Protocol and then click Add. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK. If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:

Click Add. Select Client and then click Add. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK. Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Configuring 1 2 In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties Click the IP Address tab. If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields. 232 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Figure 128 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab. If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS. If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in). Figure 129 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration 4 Click the Gateway tab. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 233 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you do not know your gateways IP address, remove previously installed gateways. If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add. 5 6 7 Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window. Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted. Turn on your Device and restart your computer when prompted. Verifying Settings 1 2 3 Click Start and then Run. In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window. Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Windows 2000/NT/XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme. 1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel. Figure 130 Windows XP: Start Menu 2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 234 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Figure 131 Windows XP: Control Panel Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Figure 132 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties 4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 235 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 133 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. Click Advanced. Figure 134 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 236 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:

In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. Click OK when finished. Figure 135 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 7 In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):

Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 237 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 136 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 8 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 11 Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6.0. 1 Click the Start icon, Control Panel. 238 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Figure 137 Windows Vista: Start Menu Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network and Internet. Figure 138 Windows Vista: Control Panel 3 Click Network and Sharing Center. Figure 139 Windows Vista: Network And Internet 4 Click Manage network connections. Figure 140 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 239 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 5 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. Figure 141 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties. Figure 142 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens (the General tab). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. 240 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. Click Advanced. Figure 143 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties 8 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:

In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. Click OK when finished. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 241 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 144 Windows Vista: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 9 In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, (the General tab):

Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. 242 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Figure 145 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window. 11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 12 Close the Network Connections window. 13 Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. Macintosh OS 8/9 1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control Panel. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 243 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 146 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu 2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list. Figure 147 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP 3 4 244 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list. For statically assigned settings, do the following:

AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your Device in the Router address box. 5 6 7 Close the TCP/IP Control Panel. Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration. Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window. Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window. Figure 148 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu 2 Click Network in the icon bar. Select Automatic from the Location list. Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list. Click the TCP/IP tab. 3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 245 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 149 Macintosh OS X: Network 4 5 6 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your Device in the Router address box. Click Apply Now and close the window. Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window. Linux 246 This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE) Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE. 1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click Network. Figure 150 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices 2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown. Figure 151 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General If you have a dynamic IP address, click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list. If you have a static IP address, click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields. 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 247 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 4 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 152 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS 5 6 Click the Devices tab. Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save the changes in all screens. Figure 153 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate 7 After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen. Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address. 1 248 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with any plain text editor. If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure shows an example. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Figure 154 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=dhcp USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. Figure 155 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=static IPADDR=192.168.1.10 NETMASK=255.255.255.0 USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet 2 3 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified. Figure 156 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf nameserver 172.23.5.1 nameserver 172.23.5.2 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter ./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example. Figure 157 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card

[root@localhost init.d]# network restart Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]

Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]

Setting network parameters: [OK]

Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]

Bringing up interface eth0: [OK]

Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 249 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 158 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties

[root@localhost]# ifconfig eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44 inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb) Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000

[root@localhost]#

250 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide APPENDIX B IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered. Structure An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 251 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 159 Network Number and Host ID How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask. Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term subnet is short for sub-network. A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 100 Subnet Masks 1ST OCTET:

(192) 11000000 11111111 11000000 2ND OCTET:

(168) 10101000 11111111 10101000 3RD OCTET:

(1) 00000001 11111111 00000001 4TH OCTET

(2) 00000010 00000000 00000010 IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Network Number Host ID By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a 1 value). For example, an 8-bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. 252 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 101 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST OCTET 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 8-bit mask 16-bit mask 24-bit mask 29-bit mask 2ND OCTET 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 3RD OCTET 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 4TH OCTET DECIMAL 00000000 00000000 00000000 11111000 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:

Table 102 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK 8 bits 16 bits 24 bits 29 bits 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.24 8 HOST ID SIZE 24 bits 16 bits 8 bits 3 bits 224 2 216 2 28 2 23 2 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 16777214 65534 254 6 Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a /

followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations. Table 103 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK ALTERNATIVE NOTATION

/24

/25

/26 LAST OCTET

(BINARY) 0000 0000 1000 0000 1100 0000 LAST OCTET

(DECIMAL) 0 128 192 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 253 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 103 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation (continued) SUBNET MASK ALTERNATIVE NOTATION

/27

/28

/29

/30 LAST OCTET

(BINARY) 1110 0000 1111 0000 1111 1000 1111 1100 LAST OCTET

(DECIMAL) 224 240 248 252 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address

(192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts. The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. Figure 160 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-

networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25). The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-

networks, A and B. 254 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Figure 161 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnets address itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. Example: Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits

(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Table 104 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address (Decimal) IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.63 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 00000000 11000000 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 255 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 105 Subnet 2 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.127 Table 106 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.191 Table 107 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.255 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 01000000 11000000 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 10000000 11000000 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 11000000 11000000 Example: Eight Subnets Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). FIRST ADDRESS The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 108 Eight Subnets SUBNET SUBNET ADDRESS 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 LAST ADDRESS 30 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BROADCAST ADDRESS 31 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 256 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Subnet Planning Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting SUBNET MASK The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. Table 109 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 NO. SUBNETS NO. SUBNETS SUBNET MASK The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. Table 110 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 255.255.128.0 (/17) 255.255.192.0 (/18) 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 32766 16382 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Device. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 257 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your Device that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 258 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide APPENDIX C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 162 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. 1 2 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 259 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 163 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 2 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. 260 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 164 Internet Options: Privacy 3 4 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 165 Pop-up Blocker Settings AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 261 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 6 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 166 Internet Options: Security 2 3 Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 6 Click OK to close the window. 262 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 167 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 2 3 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 5 Click OK to close the window. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 263 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 168 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 169 Java (Sun) 264 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary. You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears. Figure 170 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options Click Content to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 171 Mozilla Firefox Content Security AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 265 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 266 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide APPENDIX D Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 172 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 267 Appendix D Wireless LANs Figure 173 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. 268 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Figure 174 Infrastructure WLAN Appendix D Wireless LANs Channel RTS/CTS A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 269 Appendix D Wireless LANs Figure 175 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS

(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS

(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. 270 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Preamble Type Appendix D Wireless LANs Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the Device uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:

Table 111 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE (MBPS) MODULATION 1 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/

54 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the Device are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Device identity. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 271 Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your Device. Table 112 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Least Secure SECURITY TYPE Unique SSID (Default) Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) WPA2 Most Secure Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:

User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:

Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. 272 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:

Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:

Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 273 Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-

side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. 274 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 113 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP-TLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Hard No Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty Client Identity Protection EAP-TTLS Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes EAP-MD5 No No No No None Easy No PEAP Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes LEAP Yes No No Yes Moderate Moderate No WPA and WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP). TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 275 Appendix D Wireless LANs called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check

(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP) User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. 276 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 3 4 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client. The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. Figure 176 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 2 3 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches. The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 277 Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 177 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 114 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open ENTER MANUAL KEY ENCRYPTIO N METHOD IEEE 802.1X None No Open Shared WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK Antenna Overview WEP WEP TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. 278 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antennas coverage area. Antenna Gain Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications. For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment. Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides. Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications. Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points. Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications. Positioning Antennas In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-topoint application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible. For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 279 Appendix D Wireless LANs 280 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide APPENDIX E IPv6 Overview IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. Link-local Address A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as follows. Table 115 Link-local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 10 bits Interface ID 64 bits 0 54 bits AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 281 Appendix E IPv6 Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3. Unspecified Address An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address. It is similar to 0.0.0.0 in IPv4. Loopback Address A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to 127.0.0.1 in IPv4. Multicast Address In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group. Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses. Table 116 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 DESCRIPTION All hosts on a local node. All routers on a local node. All hosts on a local connected link. All routers on a local connected link. All routers on a local site. All DHCP severs on a local site. The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group. Table 117 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 282 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Table 117 Reserved Multicast Address (continued) Appendix E IPv6 MULTICAST ADDRESS FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. Interface ID In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should have a unique interface ID. EUI-64 The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-

byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the following example. MAC 00 : 13

: 49

: 12

: 34

: 56 EUI-64 02 : 13

: 49

: FF

: FE

: 12

: 34

: 56 Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated. Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses dont need to be maintained by a DHCP server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own Ethernet MAC address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address. When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address

(beginning with fe80). When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the Device is set to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 3another address which AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 283 Appendix E IPv6 combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a routable global IP address. DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP. Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device. Identity Association An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information. The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's discretion. T1 T2 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Rebind to S2 Rebind to S2 DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-

known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network. The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, 3. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses. 284 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix E IPv6 such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts. Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Device uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements

(RAs) regularly by multicast, the Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping". Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4. MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join. MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message for that address. An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group. Transition Techniques IPv6 Over IPv4 Tunnelling To route traffic between two IPv6 networks over an IPv4 network, an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel has to be used. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 285 Appendix E IPv6 On the Device, you can either set up a configured tunnel or an automatic 6to4 tunnel. The following describes each method. Configured Tunnel A configured tunnel is a point-to-point tunnelling mechanism that encapsulates an IPv6 address with an IPv4 address. Routers (A and B) on both IPv6 networks (1 and 2) each must have an interface that connects to the IPv4 network (with an IPv4 address). This allows the router to send and receive IPv6 data over the IPv4 network. In this case, you must specify Bs public IPv4 address on A (similarly, specify As public IPv4 address on B) in order for packets to arrive at the intended destination through the IPv4 network. Figure 178 Configured Tunnel Example 6to4 Tunnel A 6to4 tunnel is an automatic tunnelling mechanism that provides connection between IPv6 networks across an IPv4 network. To transmit IPv6 packets over an IPv4 network, the IPv6 packets are encapsulated inside IPv4 packets. The following figure shows a network example. Figure 179 6to4 Relay Router Network Example In a 6to4 tunnel, 6to4 routers (A and B in the example network) forward these packets between IPv6 networks (1 and 2) over the IPv4 Internet. A 6to4 relay router (C) connects to both an IPv6 and IPv4 network. A 6to4 relay router is used to forward packets between 6to4 routers in an IPv4 Internet and an IPv6 device (Z) on the IPv6 Internet. To transmit packets, a 6to4 address is used with a special IPv6 prefix of 2002:: to encode a given IPv4 address. A 6to4 address has the following format:

2002:IPv4 address:subnet ID:host ID/64 286 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix E IPv6 For example, if you have an IPv4 address of 192.168.1.1 (first converted to binary notation and then to the colon hexadecimal representation of c0a8:0101), then the 6to4 addresses is 2002:c0a8:0101::1/

64. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses. C:\>ipv6 install Installing... Succeeded. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IP Address. : 10.1.1.46 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 IP Address. : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4 Default Gateway . : 10.1.1.254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer. Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.) This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:

1 2 3 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer. After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client Install as service. Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. 4 Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 287 Appendix E IPv6 5 Click Start and then OK. 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer. To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:

Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection. Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it. Click OK to save the change. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 1 2 3 288 Appendix E IPv6 4 5 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IPv6 Address. : 2001:b021:2d::1000 Link-local IPv6 Address . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11 IPv4 Address. : 172.16.100.61 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11 172.16.100.254 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 289 Appendix E IPv6 290 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide APPENDIX F Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 291 Appendix F Services Table 118 Examples of Services NAME PROTOCOL AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined PORT(S) 51 AIM AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME DNS TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP ESP

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined FINGER FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP User-Defined ICQ IGMP (MULTICAST) UDP User-Defined IKE IMAP4 IMAP4S IRC UDP TCP TCP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP NetBIOS TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 50 79 20 21 1720 80 443 1 4000 2 500 143 993 6667 1863 137 138 139 445 DESCRIPTION The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for instance www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/

server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-mail. This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN. 292 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix F Services Table 118 Examples of Services (continued) NAME NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING POP3 POP3S PPTP PROTOCOL TCP TCP UDP PORT(S) 5190 144 2049 TCP 119 User-Defined 1 TCP TCP TCP 110 995 1723 PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 RCMD REAL_AUDIO REXEC RLOGIN ROADRUNNER RTELNET RTSP SFTP SMTP SMTPS TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP TCP/UDP TCP TCP TCP SNMP SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 512 7070 514 513 1026 107 554 115 25 465 161 162 DESCRIPTION An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/

server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215). AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 293 Appendix F Services Table 118 Examples of Services (continued) NAME SQL-NET PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) 1521 SSDP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TACACS TELNET VDOLIVE UDP TCP/UDP UDP UDP UDP TCP TCP UDP 1900 22 1558 514 49 23 7000 user-

defined DESCRIPTION Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP). Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/

IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application. 294 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide APPENDIX G Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2012 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without ice. This publication is subject to change without ice. Trademarks ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will occur in a particular installation. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 295 Appendix G Legal Information If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 2 3 4 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.

Notices Changes or modifications expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. 296 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com. 2 3 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page. Select the certification you wish to view from this page. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Notice Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail ices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. End-User License Agreement for "AMG1302-T10A"

WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU, IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 297 Appendix G Legal Information HOWEVER, CERTAIN ZYXEL'S PRODUCTS MAY CONTAIN-IN PART-SOME THIRD PARTY'S FREE AND OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY, RUN, DISTRIBUTE, MODIFY AND IMPROVE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTY'S LICENSES ("OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS"). THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW. ZYXEL MAY HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND/OR SOFTWARE, OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FREELY COPY, MODIFY AND REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY. NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND LICENSES YOU MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY. 1.Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-sublicense, non-

transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"), including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for internal business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are disclaimed. 2.Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software, Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement. 3.Copyright The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law, trade secret law, international treaty provisions, and the applicable national laws of each respective country. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation. 4.Restrictions You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance, technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer, decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License, you may not market, co-brand, and private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the 298 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information foregoing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the third party software, and your use of such material is exclusively governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software other than compliance with the applicable license terms of such third party, and makes no warranty (express, implied or statutory) whatsoever with respect thereto. Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products. 5.Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software. 6.No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION, OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. 7.Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE, BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT'S PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 8.Export Restrictions AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 299 Appendix G Legal Information THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8. 9.Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. 10.Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement. 11.General This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration. This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties. NOTE: Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy, modify and redistribute the software. For at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software, we will give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support (support@zyxel.com.tw), for a charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs that we distributed to you if we are in possession of such. 300 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 301 Appendix G Legal Information This Product includes Linux Kernel, gcc, binutil, Ebtables , Busybox, Iptables, Boa, Bftpd, br2684ctl, brctl, Ez-ipupdate, ntpclient, zebra, utelnetd, rp-pppoe, iwpriv, matrixssl, igmpproxy, mtd, inetd, dnsmasq, ntfs-3g, tc, ecmh, and Dproxy-nexgen under below GPL license GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software

(and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. 302 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Appendix G Legal Information TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The

"Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 303 Appendix G Legal Information on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-

readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your 304 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and

"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 305 Appendix G Legal Information TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein, if any, are the property of their respective owners. This Product includes uClibc, libtam, and vconfig under the LGPL License. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software

(and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it;

that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. 306 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 307 Appendix G Legal Information GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)

"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other 308 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.

(Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 309 Appendix G Legal Information these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-

compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 310 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and

"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 311 Appendix G Legal Information LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS. This Product includes Mxml under below license Mini-XML License The Mini-XML library and included programs are provided under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License (LGPL) with the following exceptions:

1.Static linking of applications to the Mini-XML library does not constitute a derivative work and does not require the author to provide source code for the application, use the shared Mini-XML libraries, or link their applications against a user-supplied version of Mini-XML. If you link the application to a modified version of Mini-XML, then the changes to Mini-XML must be provided under the terms of the LGPL in sections 1, 2, and 2.You do not have to provide a copy of the Mini-XML license with programs that are linked to the Mini-XML library, nor do you have to identify the Mini-XML license in your program or documentation as required by section 6 of the LGPL. This Product includes ISC DHCP under below ISC License ISC License Copyright 2004-2011 by Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC") Copyright 1995-2003 by Internet Software Consortium Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. 312 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information This Product includes ppp below below license PPP License All of the code can be freely used and redistributed. The individual source files each have their own copyright and permission notice. Pppd, pppstats and pppdump are under BSD-style notices. Some of the pppd plugins are GPL'd. Chat is public domain. This Product includes net-snmp below license Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts.

---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----

Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 313 Appendix G Legal Information and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission. CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----

Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR 314 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----

Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----

AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 315 Appendix G Legal Information Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Use is subject to license terms below. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 316 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information

---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----

Copyright (c) 2003-2009, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----

Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. All rights reserved. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 317 Appendix G Legal Information Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----

Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003 oss@fabasoft.com Author: Bernhard Penz Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 318 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----

Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 319 Appendix G Legal Information SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----

Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS

``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 320 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal InformationSafety Warnings Safety Warnings Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do not store things on the device. Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do not place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. Do not use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source. Do not attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged. Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 321 Appendix G Legal InformationSafety Warnings 322 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Index Index MBS 75, 80 PCR 75, 79 QoS 75, 79, 83 SCR 75, 80 status 225 authentication 114, 116 RADIUS server 116 WPA 104 B backup configuration 220 Basic Service Set, See BSS 267 Basic Service Set, see BSS broadcast 70 BSS 117, 267 example 117 C CA 274 CBR 75, 79, 83 Certificate Authority See CA. certifications 295 notices 296 viewing 297 channel 269 interference 269 channel, wireless LAN 114 CLI 15 client list 89 Command Line Interface, see CLI compatibility, WDS 110 configuration backup 220 CWMP 200 Numbers 802.1p 172, 174 A activation CWMP 200 dynamic DNS 178 DYNDNS wildcard 178 firewalls 143 MAC address filter 106 NAT 128 port binding 164 port forwarding 132 QoS 170, 171 SIP ALG 136 SSID 107 UPnP 188 VLAN 168 wireless LAN 99 scheduling 112 WPS 109 address mapping 133 rules 134 types 134, 135, 138 administrator password 22, 203 alerts 207 alternative subnet mask notation 253 antenna directional 279 gain 279 omni-directional 279 anti-probing 142 AP (access point) 269 application filter 154 applications, NAT 138 asymmetrical routes 143 Asynchronous Transfer Mode, see ATM ATM 225 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 323 Index DHCP 89 firewalls 142, 146 IP alias 91 IP precedence 172 IP/MAC filter 156 logs 207 port forwarding 130 reset 221 restoring 220 static route 161 WAN 71 wireless LAN 99 wizard 58 connection nailed-up 78, 82 on demand 78 copyright 295 CPE WAN Management Protocol, see CWMP CTS (Clear to Send) 270 CTS threshold 104, 114 customized services 147, 148 CWMP 199 activation 200 configuration 200 D data fragment threshold 104, 114 default server, NAT 129, 131 Denials of Service, see DoS DHCP 86, 89, 93 diagnostic 223 DiffServ Code Point, see DSCP disclaimer 295 DNS 86, 89, 94, 185 documentation related 2 Domain Name System, see DNS DoS 141 DSCP 172 DSL connections, status 226 dynamic DNS 177 activation 178 wildcard 177 activation 178 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 274 DYNDNS wildcard 177 activation 178 E EAP Authentication 273 encapsulation 69, 72, 78 ENET ENCAP 80 PPPoA 81 PPPoE 80 RFC 1483 81 encryption 99, 116, 275 WEP 100 key 101 WPA 103 authentication 104 reauthentication 103 WPA-PSK 102 pre-shared key 102 ENET ENCAP 72, 78, 80 ESS 268 Extended Service Set, See ESS 268 F FCC interference statement 295 filters 153 application 154 IP/MAC 156 structure 153 IP/MAC filter configuration 156 MAC address 106, 115 activation 106 URL 153, 154 firewalls 141 actions 146 activation 143 address types 146 anti-probing 142 asymmetrical routes 143 configuration 142, 146 customized services 147, 148 324 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide default action 143 DoS 141 example 46 ICMP 142 packet direction 143 rules 144, 149 security 150 status 29 triangle route 143, 151 solutions 152 firmware 217 version 28 forwarding ports 128, 129 activation 132 configuration 130 example 130 rules 132 fragmentation threshold 104, 114, 270 FTP 15, 182 G Guide Quick Start 2 H hidden node 269 I IANA 258 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA IBSS 267 ICMP 142, 185 IEEE 802.11g 271 IGA 136 IGMP 70, 86, 96 ILA 136 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 267 Index initialization vector (IV) 276 Inside Global Address, see IGA Inside Local Address, see ILA Internet Control Message Protocol, see ICMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6 IP address 70, 72, 78, 81, 85, 94 default server 129, 131 ping 223 private 95 IP alias 90 configuration 91 NAT applications 138 IP precedence 172, 174 configuration 172 IP/MAC filter 156 configuration 156 structure 153 IPv6 281 addressing 281 EUI-64 283 global address 282 interface ID 283 link-local address 281 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 281 ping 281 prefix 281 prefix length 281 stateless autoconfiguration 283 unspecified address 282 L LAN 85 client list 89 DHCP 86, 89, 93 DNS 86, 89, 94 IGMP 86, 96 IP address 85, 86, 94 IP alias 90 configuration 91 MAC address 90 multicast 86, 96 RIP 86, 88, 95 status 29 subnet mask 86, 87, 94 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 325 Index LEDs 18 limitations wireless LAN 117 WPS 124 Local Area Network, see LAN login 21 passwords 21, 22 logs 207 alerts 207 settings 207 M MAC address 90, 106 filter 98, 99, 106, 115 MAC address filter activation 106 Management Information Base (MIB) 184 mapping address 133 rules 134 types 134, 135, 138 Maximum Burst Size, see MBS Maximum Transmission Unit, see MTU MBS 75, 80, 83 MBSSID 118 MTU 75, 80 multicast 70, 86, 96 IGMPInternet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP Multiple BSS, see MBSSID multiplexing 72, 78, 81 LLC-based 81 VC-based 81 N nailed-up connection 73, 78, 82 NAT 78, 127, 136, 137, 257 activation 128 address mapping 133 rules 134 types 134, 135, 138 applications 138 IP alias 138 default server IP address 129, 131 example 137 global 137 IGA 136 ILA 136 inside 136 local 137 outside 136 P2P 129 port forwarding 128, 129 activation 132 configuration 130 example 130 rules 132 remote management 180 SIP ALG 135 activation 136 SUA 128 Network Address Translation see NAT Network Address Translation, see NAT O other documentation 2 P P2P 129 packet direction 143 Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 276, 277 passwords 21, 22 administrator 203 PBC 119 PCR 75, 79, 82 Peak Cell Rate, see PCR PIN, WPS 109, 110, 119 example 121 port binding 163 activation 164 summary screen 165 port forwarding 128, 129 activation 132 configuration 130 example 130 326 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide rules 132 PPPoA 72, 78, 81 PPPoE 72, 78, 80 preamble 105, 114 preamble mode 271 pre-shared key 102 private IP address 95 probing, firewalls 142 product registration 297 PSK 276 push button 17, 110 Push Button Configuration, see PBC push button, WPS 119 Q QoS 169 802.1p 172, 174 activation 170, 171 DSCP 172 example 169 IP precedence 172, 174 priority queue 175 Quality of Service, see QoS Quick Start Guide 2 R RADIUS 272 message types 273 messages 273 shared secret key 273 RADIUS server 116 reauthentication, WPA 103 registration product 297 related documentation 2 remote management 179 DNS 185 FTP 182 ICMP 185 NAT 180 WWW 181 Index reset 19, 221 restart 221 restoring configuration 220 RFC 1483 72, 78, 81 RIP 86, 88, 95 Routing Information Protocol, see RIP RTS (Request To Send) 270 threshold 269, 270 RTS threshold 104, 114 rules, port forwarding 132 S safety warnings 321 schedules wireless LAN 112 SCR 75, 80, 83 security network 150 wireless LAN 99, 114 Service Set IDentifier, see SSID setup DHCP 89 firewalls 142, 146 IP alias 91 IP precedenceQoS IP precedence 172 IP/MAC filter 156 logs 207 port forwarding 130 static route 161 WAN 71 wireless LAN 99 wizard 58 shaping traffic 82, 83 Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP Single User Account, see SUA SIP ALG 135 activation 136 SNMP 183 agents 183 Manager 183 managers 183 MIB 184 network components 183 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 327 Index versions 183 SSID 98, 99, 108, 115 activation 107 MBSSID 118 static route 159 configuration 161 example 159 status 24, 27, 30 ATM 225 DSL connections 226 firewalls 29 firmware version 28 LAN 29 WAN 29 wireless LAN 29 WPS 109 SUA 128 subnet 251 subnet mask 86, 94, 252 subnetting 254 Sustain Cell Rate, see SCR system 203 firmware 217 version 28 LED 18 passwords 21, 22 administrator 203 reset 19 status 24, 27 firewalls 29 LAN 29 WAN 29 wireless LAN 29 time 204 T tagging frames 168 thresholds data fragment 104, 114 RTS/CTS 104, 114 time 204 TR-069 15 trademarks 295 traffic shaping 82 example 83 328 triangle route 143, 151 solutions 152 U UBR 75, 79, 84 unicast 70 Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP upgrading firmware 217 UPnP 187 activation 188 cautions 187 example 189 installation 189 NAT traversal 187 URL 153 URL filter 154 URL 153 V VBR 83 VBR-nRT 75, 79, 84 VBR-RT 75, 79, 83 VCI 72, 78, 81 Virtual Channel Identifier, see VCI Virtual Local Area Network, see VLAN Virtual Path Identifier, see VPI VLAN 167 activation 168 tagging frames 168 VPI 72, 78, 81 W WAN 69 ATM QoS 75, 79, 83 encapsulation 69, 72, 78 IGMP 70 IP address 70, 72, 78, 81 mode 72, 77 MTU 75, 80 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide multicast 70 multiplexing 72, 78, 81 nailed-up connection 73, 78, 82 NAT 78 setup 71 status 29 traffic shaping 82 example 83 VCI 72, 78, 81 VPI 72, 78, 81 warranty 297 note 297 WDS 110, 118 compatibility 110 example 118 web configurator 15, 21 login 21 passwords 21, 22 WEP 100, 116 key 101 Wide Area Network, see WAN Wi-Fi Protected Access 275 WiFi Protected Setup, see WPS wireless client WPA supplicants 276 Wireless Distribution System, see WDS wireless LAN 97, 113 activation 99 authentication 114, 116 BSS 117 example 117 channel 114 configuration 99 encryption 99, 116 example 113 fragmentation threshold 104, 114 limitations 117 MAC address filter 98, 99, 106, 115 MBSSID 118 preamble 105, 114 RADIUS server 116 RTS/CTS threshold 104, 114 scheduling 112 security 114 SSID 98, 99, 108, 115 activation 107 status 29 WDS 110, 118 compatibility 110 Index example 118 WEP 100, 116 key 101 wizard 63 WPA 103, 116 authentication 104 reauthentication 103 WPA-PSK 102, 116 pre-shared key 102 WPS 108, 118, 121 activation 109 adding stations 110 example 122 limitations 124 PIN 109, 110, 119 push button 17, 110, 119 status 109 wireless security 271 Wireless tutorial 33 wizard 55 configuration 58 wireless LAN 63 WLAN interference 269 security parameters 278 WPA 103, 116, 275 authentication 104 key caching 276 pre-authentication 276 reauthentication 103 user authentication 276 vs WPA-PSK 276 wireless client supplicant 276 with RADIUS application example 277 WPA2 275 user authentication 276 vs WPA2-PSK 276 wireless client supplicant 276 with RADIUS application example 277 WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 275 WPA2-PSK 275, 276 application example 277 WPA-PSK 102, 116, 275, 276 application example 277 pre-shared key 102 WPS 108, 118, 121 activation 109 adding stations 110 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 329 Index example 122 limitations 124 PIN 109, 110, 119 example 121 push button 17, 110, 119 status 109 330 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide Index AMG1302-T10A Users Guide 331 Index 332 AMG1302-T10A Users Guide